JP2020151065A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a performance from becoming inappropriate.SOLUTION: A performance control CPU 120: can execute, as a performance during a variable display, setup suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, or ready-to-win forenotice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9: when the pattern PT-9 is drawn in a ready-to-win forenotice lottery in determination processing of the performance during the variable display, in a step S294, determines execution of the ready-to-win forenotice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 preferentially to the setup suggestion; and even when the lottery of the setup suggestion is executed in a step S296 but if setup suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is not drawn, in a step S301, determines the execution of the ready-to-win forenotice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 preferentially to the setup suggestion (low) based on any of the pattern PT-1 to PT-4.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 59-2

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player.

Some conventional gaming machines can change the probability that the variable display result will be a big hit (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) by changing the set value (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed, but for example, a notice effect that suggests that a jackpot state, which is an advantageous state, is obtained. When any of the above setting suggestion effects can be executed, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and the setting suggestion effect to be set as a set value when controlled in an advantageous state is executed. There was a problem that the production became inappropriate.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing improper production.

The game machine of means 1
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A storage means for storing data (for example, a data area of ROM 101) and
By specifying a relative value from a specific address, a specific instruction (for example, an LDT instruction) for reading data from the storage area of the storage means at the specified address is executed based on a program (for example, an intra-area program). Instruction execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100) and
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect by any of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. The part that can execute the setting suggestion based on, or the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9),
The storage means has a plurality of table-format data (for example, a determination value for a jackpot lottery, a determination value for determining a fluctuation pattern, etc.) used in a predetermined range of storage areas starting from the specific address according to the progress of the game. Table format data) is stored and
The specific instruction is used in a program (for example, reading a determination value of a big hit lottery) that is frequently executed by the instruction executing means.
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed by the predetermined effect executing means (for example, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the symbol (variable display mode). (Timing before reaching)), the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed in preference to the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used in FIG. 59- of the first embodiment). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 2, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach advance notice lottery, the execution of the reach advance notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in step S294 with priority over the setting suggestion. If the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is not won even if the lottery for the setting suggestion is executed in the part to be performed or in step S296, the reach based on the pattern PT-8 is not won in step S301. A part that prioritizes the execution of the notice (low) over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. / The effect control CPU 120 determines the reach notice (high)> setting suggestion. (High)> Reach notice (Low)> Setting suggestion (Low) A part that determines the execution of the effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio (see FIG. 59-7 of Modification 1). )))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of a specific mode from being executed and the effect from becoming inappropriate.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the game information display part. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a probabilistic state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a probabilistic state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), (C). Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value confirmation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) shows the display mode of the display monitor when a setting value abnormality error occurs or when the power failure during the setting change is restored. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display during the setting change processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode when a setting value abnormality error occurs or It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a special symbol display device when it recovers from the power failure during setting change. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display result determination module. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop end processing. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the modification A. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the modification A. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the modification A. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the modification A. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command in the modification B. It is a figure for demonstrating the process which concerns on conversion and restoration of the random value MR3 for determination of a variation pattern in modification B. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random number value determination processing at the time of a prize in the modification B. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead variation pattern command analysis processing in the modification B. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice setting process in the modification B. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing using the common buffer in the modification C. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control timer interrupt process which performs the timer update process in the modification D. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol process process which performs the 2nd zero flag update process in the modification D. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process in the modification D. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation processing based on the 2nd zero flag in the modification D. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing based on the 2nd zero flag in the modification D. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st small hit end processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through the 2nd gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the way of transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating display mode of right-handed notification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect type during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the effect (reach notice) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of the effect during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect mode of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process during variable display as a modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion when the effect type determination table C is used. (A) is a diagram showing an effect period of the variable display effect as in the second embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, and (B) is set when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period and the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach in the third embodiment, and (B) is the figure showing the execution decision ratio of the setting suggestion. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as Example 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display as Example 4. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the fluctuation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach in the fourth embodiment, and (B) is the fluctuation pattern. The figure showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the normal reach, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion of. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as a modification 2. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 which are common to all the variation patterns in the modified example 2, and (B) is the diagram in which the variation pattern is the normal reach / super reach. The figure showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in common, (C) shows the variation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach, and the third in the set value 1 and the set value 6. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in 3 periods. It is a figure which shows an example of execution rate, appearance rate, and reliability of notice X. It is a figure which shows an example of other execution rate, appearance rate, and reliability of notice X. It is a figure which shows an example of execution rate and appearance rate of notice Y. It is a figure which shows an example of execution rate and appearance rate of notice Z. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map of the memory area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific instruction processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of reading the data using the LDT instruction.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 3, between a door opening position in which a glass door frame 3a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 3 centering on the left side and a door closing position in which the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a, and when the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the frame 3 for the game machine can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the frame 3 for the game machine and the glass. The door frame 3a cannot be opened.

A game information display unit 200 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, a lower left position of the game area), and the game information display unit 200 is provided with a plurality of types of special identification information. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B that perform variable display (also referred to as a special symbol game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special symbol) are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative symbol that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A first reserved storage display area 5D and a second reserved storage display area 5U are set at two locations on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is held is performed. An active display area may be provided for displaying the active display corresponding to the variable display during execution. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, the game information display unit 200 is provided with a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs, and the first hold indicator 25A depends on the number of LEDs lit. , The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the device including an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations below the left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

Further, the game information display unit 200 is provided with a normal symbol display 20. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Further, the game information display unit 200 is provided with a general drawing hold display 25C. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

Further, in the game information display unit 200, the above-mentioned first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, first hold display 25A, second hold display 25B, normal symbol display 20, ordinary symbol In addition to the hold display 25C, the figure hold display 25C has a round display 131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and games such as a high base state (time saving state) and a big hit game state. A right-handed lamp 132 that lights up in the game state in which the ball is launched toward the right game area 2R, a probability-changing lamp 133 that lights up in the probability-changing state, and a time-saving lamp 134 that lights up in the high base state (time-saving state) are provided ( See FIG. 9 below).

The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 2L where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is a game. It is formed in the right game area 2R where the ball can flow down.

The left game area 2L is a game area in which a game ball launched relatively weakly (left-handed) by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 2R is a left game area 2L by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a game ball launched (right-handed) stronger than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 2C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 2L, and a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged in the right game area 2R from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 2R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 2L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 2R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of obstacle nails K1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game ball flowing down the left game area 2L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 2R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 201 that is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 51 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are displayed. A setting changeover switch 52 that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value, and an open sensor 90 (see FIG. 3 to be described later) that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 are provided. Although details will be described later, the set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

The setting changeover main body portion provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 is housed in the board case 201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 201 so that the board case 201 can be operated without opening the board case 201.

Since the board case 201 having the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is pressed. It can be operated by opening the frame 3 for the gaming machine. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the game hall or the like, only the clerk who has the setting key can operate the lock switch 51. Further, the lock switch 51 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by using a setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but these may be shared by one key.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the board case 201 is provided with a display monitor 29 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later. The display monitor 29 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 201. That is, the display monitor 29 is arranged in front of the board case 201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a jackpot winning probability according to a set value is changed by a setting change operation using a predetermined switch or other operating means by a person on the game hall side (a game hall clerk, etc.). It is said that. In this way, the ball ejection rate (the number of balls ejected per unit time (the number of prize balls)) changes according to the changeable jackpot winning probability, so changing the set value changes the ball ejection rate. It can be said that it does.

The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The general map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big prize opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32 or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning or the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold memory, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be open based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the big winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) are set. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effects signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the big hit game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Various display devices in the game information display unit)
Next, various display devices provided in the game information display unit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is a miss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 4A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are all different, but the jackpot that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A. At least a part of the symbol and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 9, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B each have four segments of LEDs arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 25A and second hold display 25B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display decreases (consumes) in the hold memory, and the LED in the hold display corresponds to the predetermined shift direction (left direction in the present embodiment). ) Turns off.

In the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. .. Therefore, for example, when there is one 1st special figure holding memory and 2 2nd special figure holding storages (only the LED at the left end of the 1st holding indicator 25A is lit and the second (When the two LEDs on the left of the hold indicator 25B are lit), the first special figure is after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on hold memory is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the round display 131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which segment of the segments constituting the round display 131 is lit differs depending on the situation.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(First Embodiment)
First, a first embodiment according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description will be described. In the first embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a setting function capable of setting a set value, the pressure on the capacity of the main board 11 (control board on the main side) due to the setting function is reduced. The features and the like will be described.

FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the first embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10A, the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit" is used. , Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormal) and the type of the error (abnormal) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the set value has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value changed state). The command E104H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the set value change operation has been completed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value confirmation state). The command E106H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11, in the first embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern Numerical data indicating each of MR3, a random number value MR4 for determining a normal map display result, and a random number value MR5 for determining an initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 11, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random values MR1 to MR5 is not limited thereto. The range of may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 12 shows the variation pattern in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", respectively. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the first embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... , A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the first embodiment is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. ing. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the first embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is executed. The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of Super Reach α is executed.

In the first embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is set to be high. Therefore, the normal reach fluctuation pattern And in the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of big hit.

In the first embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided to determine these variation pattern types. The type of variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for use, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the embodiment in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the fluctuation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 13 to 26, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 13 (A) and the second special figure display result determination table (setting) shown in FIG. 13 (B). Value 2), the first special figure display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 14 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 14 (B), FIG. The first special figure display result determination table (set value 3) shown in (A), the second special figure display result determination table (set value 3) shown in FIG. 15 (B), and the second figure shown in FIG. 16 (A). 1 Display result judgment table for special figure (set value 4), display result judgment table for second special figure (set value 4) shown in FIG. 16 (B), display result for first special figure shown in FIG. 17 (A). Judgment table (set value 5), second special figure display result judgment table (set value 5) shown in FIG. 17 (B), first special figure display result judgment table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 18 (A). ), The second special figure display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 18 (B), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 23 (A), and FIG. 23 (B). In addition to the big hit type judgment table (for the second special symbol), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the out-of-order fluctuation pattern judgment table, the normal figure display result judgment table (not shown), the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (Not shown) and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

13 (A) to 18 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the first embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first The display result determination table common to the special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 13A, in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state is normal. In the case of a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are "big hits". , 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "off". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 13B, in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state is normal. In the case of a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are "big hits". , 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 14A, in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state is normal. In the case of the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1253 are "big hits". , 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "off". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 14B, in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state is normal. In the case of the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1253 are "big hits". , 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 15A, in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state is normal. In the case of the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1272 are "big hits". , 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "off". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 15B, in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state is normal. In the case of the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, up to 1020-1272 is a "big hit" , 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 16A, in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state is normal. In the case of a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 102 to 1292 are "big hits". , 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "off". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 16B, in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state is normal. In the case of the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1292 are "big hits". , 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 17A, in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state is normal. In the case of a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 102 to 1317 are "big hits". , 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "off". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 17B, in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 5) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state is normal. In the case of a state or a time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 102 to 1317 are "big hits". , 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 18A, in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 6) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state is normal. In the case of the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 102 to 1346 are "big hits". , 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "off". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 18B, in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state is normal. In the case of the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 102 to 1346 are "big hits". , 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the first embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 4 is the set value. In the case of 1/240, when the set value is 5, 1/220, and when the set value is 6, 1/200), it is determined that the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state. (In the first embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, and 4 is the set value. In the case of, 1/140, when the set value is 5, 1/120, and when the set value is 6, 1/100). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 18, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different depending on each set value (for example, the set value 1). If, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the set value is 2, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state It is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplying factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value may be set to be constant (for example, 5 times). ..

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13 (A), 14 (A), 15 (A), 16 (A), 17 (A), and 18 (A), for the first special drawing. In the display result determination table, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is set to 1/200 regardless of the game state or the set value.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is determined regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13 (B), 14 (B), 15 (B), 16 (B), 17 (B), and 18 (B), for the second special drawing. In the display result determination table, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is set to 1/100 regardless of the game state or the set value.

In the first embodiment, the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. Is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, in the first embodiment, a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and controlled to the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map is illustrated. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 19, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of these, only the numerical values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical values in the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values Numerical values within the range including the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is set to 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the hit determination value can be in the range of 0 to 65535. Of these, only the numerical values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is included in the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. Numerical values within the range including are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical value is based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the range and the non-common numerical range is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and is continuous based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is determined by using the determination value included in the numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 13 (A) and 18 (B) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the first embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in the machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

23 (A) and 23 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 23A shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of. Further, FIG. 23B shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It's a table.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 24. In the first embodiment, the jackpot types are jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the state shifts to the low probability high base state, and after the end of the jackpot game. A jackpot B and a jackpot C (also referred to as a probability variation jackpot) are set, in which high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed to shift to a high-accuracy high-base state.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before it is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the first embodiment, three types of jackpots A to C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two or less jackpot types. Alternatively, four or more types may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", 0 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. ~ 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 170-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23B, in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 160 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the first embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is not determined to be big hit B. Illustrative, that is, the fact that the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value includes that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the jackpot type may be determined to be the jackpot B.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. There is.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random number value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is displayed as a special figure. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the result.

Further, in the first embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability is increased, the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined, etc.). Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, in the first embodiment, a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 while the game playability itself does not change is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect, and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 25A and 25B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table includes a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C is prepared in advance, and these jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables (for jackpot A) and In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1) For each fluctuation pattern of -3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 25 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 to 400 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 381 to 835. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 361 to 820. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 340 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 341 to 805. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 321 to 790. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and the range is 301 to 775. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 25 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 ~ 200 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 201-550 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 160 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 120 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 290 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and up to 101 to 350 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than the set value, and the set values are lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the first embodiment, when these determination values are the jackpot type "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the jackpot type is "big hit A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it may be a “big hit B” or a “big hit C”. It is possible to raise the expectation of the person.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for small hit determination can take with respect to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25C, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6, the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 is out of the range 0 to 997. 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 26 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the range 1 of the determination value of MR3 is 1. Of ~ 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 431 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 411 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and the range is 391 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and the range is 371 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 351 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4, the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 26 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for low-base medium total pending storage number 2 to 4), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR3 Of 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 481 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 400 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 401 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8, the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 26 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the range 1 of the determination value of MR3 is 1. Of ~ 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 26 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", 1 to 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Up to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are out of super reach α. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and the range is 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

In this way, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern. Is set to decrease in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common decision rate regardless of the set value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered because the variable display is not executed.

In the first embodiment, as the deviation pattern, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β deviation are narrowly different between the set values ( For example, it may differ by about 1%).

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out of alignment, even if the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value set. Alternatively, only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either the non-reach or the normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of order, the fluctuation of out of super reach α The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the pattern and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern out of super reach β may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set setting is made even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the first embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value is illustrated, but it is set. Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. That is, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or the specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is more non-reach. The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 12). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize to be stored, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Moreover, in the 1st embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved storages in the special symbol to be changed (for example, the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs according to the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol).

Further, in each of the deviation pattern determination tables of the first embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach deviation (PA2) regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be any of 1 to 6. The range of random numbers assigned to -2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the first embodiment, the ratio in which the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern out of the super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is variable at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss. It may be executed at.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

In such a RAM 102, a game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 27 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control timer setting unit. 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment are set as pending data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit 151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passing gate, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random count circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the display of the display monitor 29 in the first embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 28A, the display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, and a fourth display unit 29D. The first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the shape of "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. These first display units 29A to fifth display units 29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 29 in the first embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in the entire areas of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIGS. 28 (B) and 28 (C), the display monitor 29 has a base value (during measurement) calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all gaming states. Base L which is a real-time value) and the first out in all game states Base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 balls and the second out in all game states It was calculated in the base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each 6000 balls, and in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls for the third time in the all game state. Base 3 which is a base value and base 3 can be displayed. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 29 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 29, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 29A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 29B in order to display "bL.", Which is an abbreviation for the base L. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 29A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 29B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 29, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 29A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 29B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 29, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 29A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 29B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D.

In the display monitor 29 of the first embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU103). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-29, the main board 11 executes a control for switching the display of the display monitor 29 at intervals of 5 seconds in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 29 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-28, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 29 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 29 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 29 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 29 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. When the set value set in is "5", each base value on the display monitor 29 is displayed in red, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 29 is displayed in purple. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can identify the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 29 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main process in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step Sa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step Sa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step Sa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (step Sa004). If the backup data is not stored (step Sa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (step Sa004; N), the process proceeds to step Sa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (step). Sa003; Y, step Sa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102. (Step Sa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (step Sa005; N), the process proceeds to step Sa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (step Sa005; N). In step Sa005; Y), a setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed (a power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) was set before the power failure. It is determined whether or not the flag is set (step Sa006). If the set value changing flag is set (step Sa006; Y), the process proceeds to step Sa017, and if the set value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear indicating that the RAM clear process described later has been executed is executed. If the flag is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (step Sa007), and whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. Is determined (step Sa008).

When the clear switch is ON (step Sa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to step Sa011 (step Sa010), and when the clear switch is OFF (step Sa008; N), step Sa010 is executed. Proceed to step Sa011 without doing so.

In step Sa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa011). When the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 90 is ON (step Sa012). When the release sensor 90 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the lock switch 51 is ON and the gaming machine frame 3 is open (step Sa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not this is done (step Sa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step Sa013a; Y), the set value change process (step Sa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to step Sa013d. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step Sa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (step Sa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sa013d.

When the lock switch 51 is OFF (step Sa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (step Sa012; N), the process proceeds to step Sa013d without executing the processes of steps Sa013a to Sa013c.

In step Sa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (step Sa009) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. (Step Sa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (step Sa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (step Sa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to step Sa014. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step Sa013d; N), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step Sa014 without executing the process (step Sa013e).

In step Sa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (step Sa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (step Sa014; Y), the process proceeds to step Sa022, and if the RAM clear flag is not set (step Sa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power supply stopped). Performs recovery processing to return to the state at the time of disconnection (step Sa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to step Sa028. Proceed (step Sa016).

Further, in step Sa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (step Sa017). When the clear switch is ON (step Sa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa018) and whether or not the release sensor 90 is ON (step Sa019).

When the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa018; Y) and the release sensor 90 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 3 is opened and the lock switch 51 is turned on, the pachinko machine is operated while operating the clear switch. When the game machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (step Sa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (step Sa021). ). Then, the processes of steps Sa009 to Sa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (step Sa017; N), the lock switch 51 is OFF (step Sa018; N), and the release sensor 90 is OFF (step Sa019; N), step Sa031 is performed. move on.

Further, in step Sa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (step Sa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (step Sa023), and as shown in FIG. 35 (A), all segments constituting the display monitor 29 blink. The cold start notification is started by starting (step Sa024).

After executing step Sa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (step Sa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (step Sa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (step Sa026; N), the processes of step Sa025 and step Sa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (step Sa026; Y), the display monitor The blinking of all segments in 29 is finished (step Sa027), and the process proceeds to step Sa028.

In the first embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started, all the segments constituting the display monitor 29 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds). The present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 29 may be blinked or displayed. At least a part of all the segments constituting the monitor 29 may be turned on.

Then, in step Sa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (step Sa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and a game control microcomputer so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) intervals. The CTC register built into the 100 is set (step Sa029), and interrupts are permitted (step Sa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in step Sa031, the CPU 103 is connected to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. On the other hand, an error specification command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (step Sa031). Further, the error notification execution waiting timer is set (step Sa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (step Sa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (step Sa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (step Sa034; N), the processes of step Sa033 and step Sa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (step Sa034; Y), As shown in FIG. 35 (B), the first display unit 29A and the second display constituting the display monitor 29 are used as notifications (error notifications) of the occurrence of a setting value abnormality error or recovery from a power failure during setting change. “E.” is displayed in each of the unit 29B, the third display unit 29C, and the fourth display unit 29D (step Sa035).

Further, as shown in FIG. 36B, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step Sa036), and causes the pachinko gaming machine 1 to blink. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the amusement park via a terminal board (not shown) provided, and the process proceeds to step Sa032 (step Sa037). After that, the CPU 103 displays by repeatedly executing the processes of steps Sa032 to step Sa037 until the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall). An error occurrence notification is executed by the monitor 29, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the display monitor 29 and the first special symbol display when an abnormal set value is set or when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power failure during the change of the set value. Since the device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the game hall is in the process of generating an error or changing the set value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power has been restored from the power failure. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in step Sa008 (step Sa008; Y) or in step Sa021, the set value changing flag is set. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (step Sa009) is executed after clearing is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the RAM clear process is not limited to this. , It is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in step Sa014, not after it is determined in step Sa008 that the clear switch is ON (step Sa008; Y) or after the set value changing flag is cleared in step Sa021. It may be executed in the case (step Sa014; Y).

FIG. 30A is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process (step Sa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clear process, the CPU 103 first specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 (step Sa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) at the specified address (step Sa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (step Sa043). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (step Sa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified (step Sa044), and the specified address stores the RAM clear flag (F002). It is determined whether or not (step Sa45).

If the specified address is not the address that stores the RAM clear flag (step Sa045; N), the process proceeds to step Sa042, and if the specified address is the address that stores the RAM clear flag (step Sa045; N), the process proceeds to step Sa042. Then, the next address is specified and the process proceeds to step Sa042 (step Sa046). If the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (step Sa043; Y), the RAM clear process ends.

As shown in FIG. 30B, the RAM 102 in the first embodiment is assigned addresses (F000 to FXXX) for each storage area. Among these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. Temporary setting value is stored. Further, the RAM clear flag is stored in the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 or later) include special figure hold memory, normal figure hold memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information generated in pachinko game machine 1, and the previous special symbol. The setting value (judgment used setting value) read to set the display result judgment table when the variable display result is judged in the normal processing is stored. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value indicating a factory-shipped state (for example, a set value "0") is set at the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where a value indicating a factory default state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be executed. You may be urged to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by the display on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clear process in the first embodiment is a process of clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in an address other than the set value.

In the first embodiment, a mode of clearing data other than the set value in the RAM clearing process is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. If so, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the first embodiment) may be cleared.

Further, in the first embodiment, a mode in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is set to the register of the game control microcomputer 100. By storing in (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing or reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is omitted, and the process of the CPU 103 is performed. The load may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the RAM clear flag can be set by the processing of the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a set value changing process (step Sa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (step Sb001). The details of the game stop start process will be described later.

Next, the CPU 103 starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step Sa051), and the right-handed lamp 132 and the first hold indicator 25A, the second. The hold display 25B starts blinking (see step Sa052, FIG. 36 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one of the segments constituting the round display 131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (step Sa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (step Sa053), and determines whether or not any of 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. Determine (step Sa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in step Sa020), the address F000 in the RAM 102 is set. Set “1” as the value (reset the set value to “1”) and proceed to step Sa054 (step Sa053b). If any of the values 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 (step Sa053a; Y), the process proceeds to step Sa054 without executing the process of step Sa053b.

In step Sa054, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the start of the power failure detection process to wait until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is set to -1 (step Sa055), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (step Sa056). When the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer is not timer-out (step Sa056; N), the processes of step Sa055 and step Sa056 are repeatedly executed, and when the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer is timer-out (step). Sa056; Y) executes the power failure detection process (step Sa057).

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 29 (step Sa058), via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the amusement park (step Sa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (step Sa061), and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 52 is operated (step Sa062). If there is no operation of the setting changeover switch 52 (step Sa062; N), the process proceeds to step Sa065, and if there is an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 (step Sa062; Y), the RAM 102 is based on the operation of the setting changeover switch 52. The content of the address F001 is updated (step Sa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is "1", "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "1", is set as a temporary set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 29 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. A numerical value one larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor 29, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowing setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 29 (step Sa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa065). ..

When the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of steps Sa062 to Sa065 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or the address F001. The process of displaying the setting value stored in the display monitor 29 is executed.

Further, when the lock switch 51 is OFF in step Sa065 (step Sa065; N), the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process after executing the process of clearing the set value changing flag (step Sa066) (step Sa066). Step Sb002). The details of the game stop end process will be described later.

Next, the CPU 103 ends the display of the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 29 (step Sa067), and turns off all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. (Step Sa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 132, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 131 (step Sa068, step Sa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary set value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (step Sa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (step Sa069; N), the process proceeds to step Sa072, and if the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (step Sa069; Y), the procedure proceeds to step Sa072. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is different from the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 (step Sa070).

When the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are the same (step Sa070; N), the process proceeds to step Sa072, and the address F000 in the RAM 102 is reached. When the value of the stored set value and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are different (step Sa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is used. It is stored in the address F000 (step Sa071), and the process proceeds to step Sa072. That is, in the process of step Sa071, the temporary set value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set value.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (step Sa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (step Sa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (step Sb001). The details of the game stop start process will be described later, but this game stop start process is a process common to the game stop start process of FIG. 31.

Next, the CPU 103 starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step Sa101), and the right-handed lamp 132 and the first hold display 25A, the second. The hold display 25B starts blinking (see step Sa102, FIG. 36 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one of the segments constituting the round display 131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (step Sa103).

Further, the CPU 103 sends a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (step Sa104), and sets a power cutoff detection process execution start wait timer for waiting until the power cutoff detection process is executed (step Sa104). Step Sa105). Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is set to -1 (step Sa106), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (step Sa107). When the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer is not timer-out (step Sa107; N), the processes of step Sa106 and step Sa107 are repeatedly executed, and the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer is timer-out (step). Sa107; Y) executes the power failure detection process (step Sa108). The power failure detection process (step Sa108) is the same process as the power failure detection process (step Sa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 29 (step Sa109), via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the amusement park (step Sa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa111). When the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 51 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of step Sa111. When the lock switch 51 is OFF in step Sa111 (step Sa111; N), the game stop end process is executed (step Sb002). The details of the game stop end process will be described later, but this game stop end process is the same process as the game stop end process of FIG. 31.

Next, the CPU 103 ends the display of the set value on the display monitor 29 (step Sa112), and turns off all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step Sa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 132, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 131 (step Sa113, step Sa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (step Sa115), and ends the set value confirmation process.

In this way, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round display 131 are turned on, and the first hold display 25A and the second are held. By starting the hold display 25B and the right-handed lamp 232 blinking, the player, the clerk of the game hall, etc., are changing the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 or the set value from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the confirmation is in progress.

In the first embodiment, at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, one LED of one of the segments constituting the round display 131 is used as a mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. Although the embodiment of lighting only is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display 131 corresponds to any of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. As long as it does not, the lighting mode is not particularly limited.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the round display is set as a mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. Although the embodiment in which the segments constituting the 131 are lit in the same manner is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments constituting the round display 131 are the same as when the set value change process is started. It may be lit in a mode different from that at the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 51 is cleared with the gaming machine frame 3 open. The setting value change process is executed by turning on the switch.

At this time, in the display monitor 29, as shown in FIGS. 34 (A) to 34 (E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first display unit 29A, the second display unit 29B, and the third display unit 29 The display using the display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D (display of the base value shown in FIG. 28) is completed. That is, the display monitor 29 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value change process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value change process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 29D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 52 is operated while the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D in this way, the display on the fourth display unit 29D is updated. If the lock switch 51 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 51 is turned on (clear switch) with the gaming machine frame 3 open. Is OFF) to execute the set value confirmation process.

At this time, in the display monitor 29, as shown in FIGS. 34 (A), 34 (B) and 34 (E), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off to turn off the power of the first display unit 29A and the second display unit 29A. The display using the display unit 29B, the third display unit 29C, and the fourth display unit 29D (display of the base value shown in FIG. 28) is completed. That is, the display monitor 29 in the first embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 29D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 29D ends when the lock switch 51 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a playable state.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a power failure detection process (step Sa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (step S081). If there is no power off signal input (step S081; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (step S081; Y), backup data including the set value information stored in the RAM 122 is included. (Step S082), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step S083). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (step S084), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

In the game control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 5) in the first embodiment, the CPU 103 executes the same power failure detection process (step S200) as in steps Sa057 and Sa108 described above, and then steps S21 to S27. It may be the one that executes the processing of.

Next, the start winning determination process according to the first embodiment executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not the above (step S501a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S501a; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S502). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of reserved first special figure is not the upper limit value in step S502 (step S502; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (step S502; N). Step S503).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step S501a (step S501a; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S502 (step S502; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (step). S501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step S501b; Y), the second special figure reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S505). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S505 (step S505; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (step S505; N). Step S506).

After executing any of the processes of step S503 and step S506, the number of special figure reserved storages corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step S507). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step S508). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step S508, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the fluctuation pattern and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and specified (step S509). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S510). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step S509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time, and at the same time. It is specified to determine the variable display result in the variable display result determination module (step S525) described later.

Following the process of step S510, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step S511). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step S511, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step S512). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (Step S513). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step S513, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step S514). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step S514; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S515), and then the process of step S504 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step S514; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S516), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 38 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S512 of FIG. 37 as the winning random number value determination process. In the first embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S22, FIG. 39 in FIG. 6) described later. ) Is set as "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state, and the special figure display result is set to "small hit" to determine whether to control the small hit game state. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing in step S512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. I do. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a look-ahead advance notice effect such as a hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 38 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like, for example, to confirm the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 The current gaming state in (step S521) is specified. The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probability change state when the probability change flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probability change flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the process of step S521, the CPU 103 refers to the first address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 30B) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S522). Next, the special figure display result determination table according to the current game state, the start port buffer value, and the set value is selected and set (step S524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (step S525) shown in FIG. 40, a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing" is performed.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 includes numerical data indicating a numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and a random number value MR1 for determining the specified special figure display result. (Step S571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step S572). At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step S572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S572; Y), it is determined that the jackpot is achieved in the variable display (step S576). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S572 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step S572; N), the small hit in the set special figure display result determination table. The numerical range of the hit determination value is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result (step S573), and the disorder for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S509 of FIG. 37 is compared. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step S574).

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step S574; Y), it is determined that the numerical data is a small hit in the variable display (step S577). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S574 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the small hit does not occur in the variable display (step S574; N), it is determined that the variable display is out of range. (Step S575).

Returning to FIG. 38 (A), it is confirmed in step S575 whether or not it is determined to be a big hit in the variable display (step S526), and if it is determined not to be a big hit (step S526; N), it is variable in step S525. It is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a small hit in the display (step S527), and when it is determined that the small hit is not obtained, that is, when it is determined that the variable display is out of order (step S526; N), the variable display is performed. The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the result being "missing", is executed (step S527a), and whether or not the time reduction flag is set, that is, the current game state is time reduction. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step S528).

When it is determined in step S526 that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (step S526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (step S533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the jackpot is A, a third symbol designation command when the jackpot is B, and a fourth symbol when the jackpot is C. The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (step S534), and then the jackpot variation pattern determination table according to the jackpot type is selected and set as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step S535). The process proceeds to step S536.

If it is determined in step S527 that a small hit will occur in the variable display (step S527; Y), the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit", The transmission setting is executed (step S531), the variation pattern determination table for small hits is selected and set (step S532), and the process proceeds to step S536.

If the time saving flag is not set in step S528 (step S528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set (step S529), and if the time saving flag is set (step S529). Step S528; Y), the deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set (step S530). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In addition to these deviation pattern determination tables A and deviation pattern determination tables D, the deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 is added. The deviation pattern determination table C used when the total number of pending storages is 5 or more is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 26, the deviation pattern determination table A is non-reachable. For the fluctuation pattern, among the ranges that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take, when the set value 1 is 1, 1 to 450, when the set value is 2, 1 to 430, and when the set value is 3. 1 to 410, when the set value is 4, 1-390 is assigned, when the set value is 5, 1-370 is assigned, and when the set value is 6, 1-350 are assigned.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, for the non-reach variation pattern, the set value is 1 to 500 when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. 2 is 1 to 480, 3 is 1 to 460, 4 is 1 to 440, 5 is 1 to 420, and 6 is 1 to 1. 400 are assigned to each.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C and the deviation pattern determination table D, when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take for the non-reach variation pattern. 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, set. When the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the deviation pattern determination tables, 701 to 997 of the range that the random value MR3 for motion pattern determination can take for the fluctuation pattern of super reach is assigned regardless of the set value. There is.

Therefore, in step S529, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, the non-reach and super reach determinations change the number of reserved memories after the determination. However, since the fluctuation pattern is always non-reach or super reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined by using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table D in the determination at the time of starting winning. There is.

After executing any of the processes of step S529, step S530, step S532, and step S535, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are displayed. It is used to determine the variation category according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 (step S536). Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), when at least the variable display result is "out of place", the variable category and "non-reach" variable display mode are commonly used regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach" and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach or small hit) are provided, and the random value MR3 It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the above.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step S536 to the effect control board 12 (step S537), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S541). The second special figure reserved storage number is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S541, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step S541 (step S541; N), the hold stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (step S542). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S542, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step S543).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step S544), the process proceeds to step S549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S541 (step S541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S545). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the number of hold storages of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S545, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Just do it. As described above, the process of step S545 is executed when it is determined in step S541 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0", and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. For example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are used. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step S545 (step S545; N), the hold stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (step S546). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S546, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. At the same time, the data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step S547).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step S548), the process proceeds to step S549.

In step S549, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like (step S549). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probability change state when the probability change flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probability change flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the process of step S549, the CPU 103 refers to the start address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 30B) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information (see FIG. 30B) stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not the determination used set value is stored (step S551). When it is determined that the determined used set value is stored (step S551: Y), the set value specified in step S550 is compared with the stored determined used set value (step S552) to specify. It is determined whether or not the set value set and the stored determination used set value are the same (step S553).

If it is determined in step S553 that the specified set value and the stored determination used set value are not the same (step S553: N), an error is specified for the effect control board 12 according to the abnormality of the set value. While making settings for transmitting a command (step S554), a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step). S555), the loop processing is started. After that, since the CPU 103 does not execute other processing, the pachinko gaming machine is put into a non-gaming state (non-gaming state) by the loop processing. The error specification command is transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the set value (determined used set value) referred to when the previous variable display is executed and the set value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 When is different, the management device of the game hall can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be recognized as different. Security can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a non-gamable state by executing the loop processing and not executing other processing, but the present invention is limited to this. The CPU 103 executes processing such as limiting the launch of the game ball, and not paying out the prize ball or variablely displaying the special symbol even if the game ball is won in each winning opening. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled so as to be incapable of playing.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the first embodiment, it is regarded as an abnormality that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, and the abnormality is regarded as the management device of the amusement park. Although the recognizable form is illustrated in the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display monitor 29, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B are shown in FIG. 35 (B). ) And the display mode (lighting mode) as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the abnormality may be notified to the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the first embodiment, when the determination used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, an error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Although the embodiment in which the security signal is output to the management device of the amusement park only once is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmission of these error designation commands and the security signal The output may be repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals in the above-mentioned non-gaming state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the first embodiment, if the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a non-gamable state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 pachinko. It is not necessary to control the gaming machine 1 so that it cannot be played.

Further, when the determination used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different and the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inoperable state, for example, the game hall. Only the output of the security signal to the management device of the above may be executed, or the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored in the start address of the RAM 102, which is the most disadvantageous value for the player (No. 1). By setting 1) in the embodiment of 1, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

Judgment in step S551 When it is determined that the used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and executes the first variable display (step S551: N) or specified in step S553. If it is determined that the set value and the stored determination used set value are the same (step S553: Y), the special figure display result determination according to the current gaming state, the start port buffer value, and the set value is determined. The table is selected and set (step S556). After that, the same processing as that executed in the variable display result determination module in step S525 shown in FIG. 38A, that is, the processing of steps S571 to S557 shown in FIG. 40 is performed (step S557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed in step S557 whether or not it is determined that the variable display is a big hit (step S558), and if it is determined that the variable display is not a big hit (step S558; N), it is determined that the variable display is a small hit in step S557. It is confirmed whether or not it has been done (step S559).

If it is determined in step S558 that a big hit will occur in the variable display (step S558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 23 (A) and 23 (B) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step S562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "big hit A" and "big hit B" in the jackpot type determination table. , It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "big hit C" is matched (step S563).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S563, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a probability variation state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S564), the jackpot type determined. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "big hit A", it may be set to "1", if it is "big hit B", it may be set to "2", and if it is "big hit C", it may be set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S559 that a small hit will occur in the variable display (step S559; Y), the process proceeds to step S560 to set the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the ON state. (Step S560).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S559 that a small hit is obtained in the variable display, that is, if the variable display is not correct (step S559; N), the process proceeds to step S565.

In step S565, as a result of predetermining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set), whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set). ), And further, a fixed special symbol is set according to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step S558 that the special figure display result is "big hit", and when the big hit type in step S563 is "big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is confirmed. Set to a special symbol. When the jackpot type is "big hit B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the finalized special symbol. Further, when it is determined in step S559 that the special figure display result is "small hit" (when the small hit flag is set in step S560), the special figure display result is set to "small hit". Corresponding to the pre-determined result of, the special symbol indicating the symbol "2" which is the small hit symbol is set as the finalized special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the finalized special symbol is set in step S565, the set value specified in step S553 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the determined used set value (step S566), and then the value of the special figure process flag is used for the variable pattern setting process. After updating to the corresponding value "1" (step S567), the special symbol normal processing ends.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S545 (step S545; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step S568), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

In the first embodiment, since the determined used set value is stored in the RAM 102 as one of the game information (see FIG. 30B), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. Illustrates a mode in which the determination used setting value does not exist when the first variable display is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. By storing in the area that has not been cleared by the clear process, even if the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is determined when the first variable display is executed. The used set value and the start address of the RAM 102 are set. The stored set values (set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) may be compared.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, a mode in which a variable display result is determined using a variable display result determination module that executes a common process is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates this. The variable display result determination module is not limited to the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 (the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102) with the determined used set value (FIG. 39). Steps S551 to S553 shown below, and a process of controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a game stopped state when the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determined used set value do not match as the processing result (steps S554 to step S553). S555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 with the determined used set value and the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determined use as the processing result are used. Since it is possible to execute a process of controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state when the set values do not match, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be further improved.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start process will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers clock the time and period related to the game. The CPU 103 stops the timing of these plurality of timers when the game is stopped. These plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the large winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from the opening state to the closing state of the grand prize opening door. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for timing the interval period between rounds during the jackpot game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of one round to the start of the next round by the inter-round interval period timer.

The V-lid opening time timer is a predetermined switch (in a V-probability game machine that controls the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a timer provided in front of the sensor for detecting the V probability change) for measuring the opening time of the V lid controlled by the open state and the closed state. In the V probability variation game machine, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round among a plurality of rounds. The area where the V lid is open is called the V winning area. The CPU 103 uses a V-lid opening time timer to measure the time from when the V-lid is opened to when it is closed. The V-passing waiting time timer is a timer for timing the V-winning time for determining that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 determines that a game ball that has passed through a predetermined switch with a delay even after the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed from the open state (winning in the large winning opening just before the closing of the large winning opening door). A game ball that has passed the switch) is also judged to be a V prize within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the validity period of the V prize, which is effectively determined by the V passage waiting time timer.

The electric chew opening time timer is a timer that measures the opening time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, which is a variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. .. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, and the CPU 103 measures the time from the opening state to the closed state of the variable winning ball device 6B by the electric chew opening time timer. ..

The special figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The normal figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of a normal symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal fluctuation time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that the jackpot is controlled at the start of the jackpot. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the jackpot game state is executed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 uses a fanfare time timer to measure the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect.

The ending time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the ending effect, which is the period for notifying the end of the big hit at the end of the big hit, is executed. The ending period is a period during which the jackpot end process is executed, and is a period during which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

The CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a normal figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like as other timers other than the above-mentioned timer. The special symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation stop period timer. The normal symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol by the timer for the normal symbol fluctuation stop period.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start process (process of step Sb001) in FIGS. 31 and 32 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the game stop start process. First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is operating in the game stop start process (step Sb010). In step Sb010, if the attacker release time timer is operating (step Sb010; Y), the operating attacker release time timer is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If the attacker open time timer is not running (step Sb010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is running (step Sb011). In step Sb011, if the inter-round interval period timer is operating (step Sb011; Y), the operating inter-round interval period timer is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (step Sb011; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid opening time timer is operating (step Sb012). In step Sb012, if the V lid opening time timer is operating (step Sb012; Y), the operating V lid opening time timer is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not operating (step Sb012; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is operating (step Sb013). In step Sb013, if the V-passing waiting time timer is operating (step Sb013; Y), the operating V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not operating (step Sb013; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is operating (step Sb014). In step Sb014, if the electric chew release time timer is operating (step Sb014; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If the electric chew release time timer is not operating (step Sb014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (step Sb015). In step Sb015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (step Sb015; Y), the operating special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (step Sb015; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (step Sb016). In step Sb016, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (step Sb016; Y), the operating normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (step Sb016; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is operating (step Sb017). In step Sb017, if the fanfare time timer is operating (step Sb017; Y), the operating fanfare time timer is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not running (step Sb017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is running (step Sb018). In step Sb018, if the ending time timer is operating (step Sb018; Y), the operating ending time timer is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not operating (step Sb018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is operating as another timer (step Sb019). In step Sb019, if the other timer is operating (step Sb019; Y), the operating other timer is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If the other timer is not in operation (step Sb019; N), the other process (step Sb021) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, in the other processing (step Sb021), the following processing is included. For example, a process of disabling the firing of the ball striking handle 30, a process of disabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, a process of disabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing to invalidate the payout of prize balls. By the other process (step Sb021), various processes are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop end process (step Sb002) in FIGS. 31 and 32 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game stop end process. First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is stopped in the game stop end process (step Sb030). In step Sb030, if the attacker release time timer is stopped (step Sb030; Y), the stopped attacker release time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (step Sb030; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (step Sb031). In step Sb031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (step Sb031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (step Sb031; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid opening time timer is stopped (step Sb032). In step Sb032, if the V lid opening time timer is stopped (step Sb032; Y), the stopped V lid opening time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not stopped (step Sb032; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (step Sb033). In step Sb033, if the V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (step Sb033; Y), the stopped V-passing waiting time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not stopped (step Sb033; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is stopped (step Sb034). In step Sb034, if the electric chew open time timer is stopped (step Sb034; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If the electric chew release time timer is not stopped (step Sb034; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (step Sb035). In step Sb035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (step Sb035; Y), the stopped special figure fluctuation time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (step Sb035; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (step Sb036). In step Sb036, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (step Sb036; Y), the stopped normal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (step Sb036; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is stopped (step Sb037). In step Sb037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (step Sb037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (step Sb037; N), it is determined whether or not the ending time timer is stopped (step Sb038). In step Sb038, if the ending time timer is stopped (step Sb038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (step Sb038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (step Sb039). In step Sb039, if the other timer is stopped (step Sb039; Y), the stopped other timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If the other timer is not stopped (step Sb039; N), the other process (step Sb041) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (step Sb041) includes the following processing. For example, a process for enabling the firing of the ball striking handle 30, a process for enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, and a process for enabling the detection of various errors. It includes processing to enable the payout of prize balls. By the other process (step Sb041), various processes are enabled and the game is normally executed.

(Effects of game stop start processing and game stop end processing, etc.)
As described above, as shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 determines the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. The timekeeping of the period is stopped, and the timekeeping of the period of the attacker open time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the period of the inter-round interval period timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the inter-round interval period in the setting confirmation state. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the validity period of the V prize is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Then, based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the time counting of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is in a state where the variable winning ball device 6B can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation status, the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation status, the timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the variable display of the normal symbol being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is changed. Based on the end, the timekeeping of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the fanfare effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. ..

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is changed. Based on the end, the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the ending effect being executed and the game progressing in the setting confirmation state. ..

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. The timekeeping of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In the first embodiment, a game machine (so-called first-class game machine) that shifts to a big hit game state based on a variable display result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol has been described, but a special game machine provided in the game area has been described. A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot game state based on a game ball winning (V winning) in a special winning opening (V winning opening) in a variable winning ball device (so-called accessory). Alternatively, it may be applied to a game machine (a type 2 type mixer) in which the first type and the second type are combined. When the start winning prize to the second starting winning opening is detected, the big hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result is obtained. Game control similar to the jackpot based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening is executed, such as being controlled to the state. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a small hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result is obtained. It is controlled to the state, and the special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When a game ball is accepted by a special variable winning ball device for small hits in a small hit game state, and the game ball enters the special winning opening (V area) and is detected by a predetermined switch, it is variable for big hits. The second-class big hit game control in which the winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds is executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

In such a type 1 type 2 mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided to measure the effective period for determining that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V region) is effective. The CPU 103 also determines that the game ball that has passed the predetermined switch with a delay even after the special variable winning ball device is changed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer is also determined to be a winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the period during which the winning of the special winning opening is effectively determined by the small hit time timer. Then, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. , The timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the small hit game state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

In the first embodiment described above, various controls have been executed for the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the same control may be executed even in the setting change state. .. For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of various timers based on being controlled to the setting change state when it is in a state advantageous to the player, and various timers are based on the end of the setting change state. You may want to restart the timing of.

The timer control may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol results in a jackpot display result or a missed display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol results in a big hit display result, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. If the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol results in an incorrect display result, the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer may not be stopped even if it is controlled to the setting confirmation state. .. In this way, the timer is stopped in order to give a disadvantage to the player for the jackpot display result that is advantageous to the player, but the timer is not disadvantageous to the player for the off display result. It can be prevented from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a jackpot display result or a missed display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, when the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the out-of-order display result, the symbol stop period is reached without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer during the execution of the out-of-order variable display. Occasionally, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the set value is favorable to the player or unfavorable to the player. For example, when the setting value is favorable to the player, the various timers are stopped, but when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, the various timers are stopped. You may not stop.

(Effects of the first embodiment, etc.)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, in the display result determination table, the hit determination value is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Of these, the range from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range for the jackpot determination value. Then, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), it corresponds to each set value from 1238. The range up to the value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set with the hit determination value 1020 as the jackpot reference value. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to a non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

In particular, in the first embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided. Since it is not necessary to execute the determination of whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times as compared with the case where It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, in the display result determination table, the above-mentioned hit determination value of 1020 is used as a jackpot reference regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a probability variation state. As the value, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value are set to be a continuous numerical range, so when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, a random number value is used. Whether or not the value of MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state and the time saving state, and from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probability variation state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, in the display result determination table, the variation special figure is included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether it is the first special figure or the second special figure. The number of judgment values is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the number of judgment values in the second special figure display result judgment table is small. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value). .. Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the number is within, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is set in a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value is 6, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled. When doing so, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value, and whether or not it is controlled to the small hit gaming state. When determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure, the CPU 103 is in the big hit gaming state. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state.

Further, the RAM 102 in the first embodiment can store the installation value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, as shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 in the first embodiment reads out the set value stored in the RAM 102 every time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). At the same time, whether or not to set the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value corresponding to the read set value (set the display result judgment table according to the set value) and control the jackpot gaming state. Is judged. That is, the CPU 103 reads the set value from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read set value. Therefore, the improper set value is read and the improper variable display is performed. It is possible to prevent the display result from being determined.

In the first embodiment, the set value is read from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and the display result determination table is set according to the read set value. However, the present invention illustrates the mode. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the CPU 103 may read a set value from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and set a display result determination table according to the read set value. When setting the display result determination table according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in this way, the setting is made during the period until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected. All variable display results may be judged using the display result judgment table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and reads the read set value and the previous variable display result. A setting value read from the RAM 102 (judgment used setting value) is compared for judgment, and if the setting value read from the RAM 102 this time and the judgment used setting value do not match as the comparison result, an effect is produced. An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies an error that the set value information is abnormal based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103 (for example, an image). A notification image corresponding to an error may be displayed on the display device 5). By executing the error notification in this way, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined due to the reading of an inappropriate set value. Further, it is possible not only to more accurately identify that an inappropriate set value is set in the RAM 102, but also to make the surroundings of the game machine recognize that the set value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can quickly deal with the abnormal set value.

In the first embodiment, a mode in which the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value are compared each time the variable display is executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be executed based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result by using the variable display result determination module common to the time when the winning random number value determination is executed and the time when the special symbol normal processing is executed. Therefore, a part of the processing can be shared between when the random value value determination at the time of winning is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, if the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the CPU 103 sets a numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (display result determination table according to the set value read from the RAM 102). Therefore, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced, and further, as in the first embodiment, the large hit determination according to the set value read from the RAM 102. When setting the numerical range of the value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the processing for setting the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value read from the RAM 102 can be shared, so that the capacity of the processing program is also increased. It can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, when 1 (the set value having the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. Therefore, when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control the jackpot game state only for the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, a mode in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates this. The jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value without limitation. That is, in the first embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, a mode in which the small hit reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates the mode. The present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Although the first embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Is done.

For example, in the first embodiment, the game information display unit 200 is used as the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the normal symbol display. 20. The embodiment composed of the general drawing hold display 25C, the round display 131, the right-handed lamp 132, the probability variation lamp 133, and the time saving lamp 134 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game information display is not limited to this. The unit 200 may include at least the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B.

Further, in the first embodiment, there is a first special symbol depending on whether the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process (set value change state) or the set value confirmation process (set value confirmation state). An embodiment in which the display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are lit in the same manner has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be lit or blinked in different modes depending on whether the set value confirmation process is being executed. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in either the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. You can easily tell if there is one.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol is lit by lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A mode in which the display mode (lighting mode) of the display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the variable display result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lighting mode) of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in the set value changing state and the set value confirmation state is If the display mode of the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is not necessary to light a part of all the segments constituting the above.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B and the round display 131. The embodiment in which the segments are lit and all the segments constituting the right-handed lamp 132 and the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are blinking has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, one segment constituting the round display 131 is lit, the right-handed lamp 132 is blinking, and all segments constituting the first hold display 25A and the second hold display 25B. Blinking of is not executed or may be partially executed.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, only one of the segments constituting the round display 131 is lit, but the present invention illustrates this. The combination is not limited, and if the combination does not correspond to any of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, the number of lights of the segments constituting the round display 131 in the set value changed state and the set value confirmed state is a plurality. There may be.

Further, in the first embodiment, the embodiment in which the notification of the set value abnormality error is executed by using the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, for example, the pachinko game machine 1 may be individually provided with LEDs for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinked to notify that a set value abnormality error has occurred.

Further, in the first embodiment, an embodiment in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a display monitor 29 for displaying a base value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. May not include a display monitor 29. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 29 in this way, it is sufficient to newly provide a display means for displaying the set value (or a temporary set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the round display that constitute the game information display unit 200 An example of a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value changing state or a set value confirmation state is illustrated by setting the 131, the right-handed lamp 132, etc. in a mode different from that during the game. The first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the round display 131, which constitute the game information display unit 200, are not limited. The right-handed lamp 132 or the like may be displayed (lit or blinking) during the game as long as it can be notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the round display that constitute the game information display unit 200 An example of a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state by setting the 131, the right-handed lamp 132, etc. in a mode different from that during the game has been illustrated. The "mode different from that during the game" is not limited, and may include different blinking cycles, different brightness, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the round display that constitute the game information display unit 200 131, the mode of notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state by lighting or blinking the right-handed lamp 132 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. , When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the round An explanation that the display 131 and the right-handed lamp 132 are turned on or blinking may be provided at a predetermined position (for example, a position near the game information display unit 200) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing so, a clerk or the like of a game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first hold indicator 25A, and the second hold. It is possible to prevent the lighting and blinking of the display 25B, the round display 131, and the right-handed lamp 132 from being mistaken for a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main process of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in step Sa008 (step Sa008; Y) or in step Sa021, the set value changing flag is set. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (step Sa009) is executed after clearing is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the RAM clear process is not limited to this. , It is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in step Sa014, not after it is determined in step Sa008 that the clear switch is ON (step Sa008; Y) or after the set value changing flag is cleared in step Sa021. It may be executed in the case (step Sa014; Y).

(Modification example A: Transformation example regarding the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value and the small hit judgment value)
Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is set to the large hit determination value regardless of the gaming state and the set value. Although it is provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range, the present invention is not limited to this. Hereinafter, a modified example A relating to the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43-44.

In the modified example A, as shown in FIGS. 43 (A) and 43 (B), a numerical range of the big hit determination value and a numerical range of the small hit determination value are continuously provided regardless of the gaming state and the set value. May be good.

In addition, when the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is increased. By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1020 to 1237. At the same time, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

When the game state is the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1020-1346, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is increased from the normal state or the time saving state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the reference of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. Value). When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

Further, as a form of setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) to be continuous in this way, as shown in FIG. 44, the small hit The numerical range of the judgment value is set to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the common numerical value of the big hit judgment value is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. The range (64990-65207) may be set. Further, in this case, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is changed according to the set value. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the set value.

When setting the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIG. 44, when determining the variable display result, the CPU 103 first determines the value of the random number MR1 as the jackpot. It is determined whether or not the minimum value of the determination value (in the example shown in FIG. 44, the setting value 1 is 64990, the setting value 2 is 64974, and the setting value 3 is 64954) or more, and the value of the random number MR1 is determined. When is determined to be greater than or equal to the minimum value of the jackpot determination value, the variable display result is a jackpot by further determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or greater than the reference value of the small hit determination value of 65208. It suffices to judge whether it is a small hit or a small hit. By determining the variable display in this way, the variable display result is determined without executing both the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit and the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the determination of the variable display result of the CPU 103.

As described above, in FIGS. 43 and 44, the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value). And the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value, and when 2 to 6 are set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the common numerical range of the non-common numerical range and the small hit judgment value) Is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020, which is the reference value of the big hit judgment value, and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value, so that the large hit game state or the small hit game state It is possible to determine whether or not to control. Further, when it is determined that the control is performed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the big hit game is determined by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value in the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control the state or the small hit game state, the processing load for determining whether the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and the determination whether to control the small hit game state. It is possible to reduce the processing load of performing the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 43, when the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state by the CPU 103, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from the jackpot reference value of 1020, and the numerical value of the increased jackpot determination value increases. Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the range, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the large hit gaming state within the numerical range in which the number of the large hit determination values has increased, and controls the small hit gaming state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state. it can.

Further, also in the modes shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, so that the CPU 103 hits the jackpot. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the determination values, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the jackpot gaming state. ..

In addition, in the form shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, the mode in which the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value.

Further, in the first embodiment, an embodiment in which a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. As shown in 46, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to different numerical ranges.

When the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are set to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (small hit judgment value). The non-common numerical range (the number of judgment values included in the non-common numerical range is the largest) when the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is different from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value and the set value of the jackpot judgment value is 6. In a numerical range different from the large numerical range), the numerical range continuous from the reference value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in FIG. 45, 32767 to 33421 in FIG. 46, in each case, the reference value of the small hit judgment value is It may be set to 32767).

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the reference value of the small hit judgment value is common according to the fluctuation special figure, but the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value are the same regardless of the fluctuation special chart. There may be.

(Effect of variant A, etc.)
As described above, in the modes shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2 to 6, the numerical value different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value). In the range, the range corresponding to the set value with 60,000 as the reference value (60,000 to 60016 for the set value 2, 60000 to 60035 for the set value 3 ... 60,000 to 60109 for the set value 6) is a big hit. It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value according to the change of the set value. Therefore, the development of the pachinko gaming machine related to the set value. The load can be reduced. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control the big hit game state and whether or not to control the small hit game state.

In particular, since the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value to the jackpot gaming state with the same value of 60000 as the reference value regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 can determine the jackpot. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game state.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, so that the CPU 103 determines the jackpot determination value. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by the CPU 103.

Further, in the forms shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is a common numerical range or a non-common numerical value of the large hit determination value regardless of the set value. In a numerical range different from the range, 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094). That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of set values regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 has the same value regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with 32767 as the small hit reference value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state of the CPU 103.

In the modes shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while it is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When 1 is set as the value, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when a value of 2 or more is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot judgment value corresponding to each set value is set. Although the mode of setting the non-common numerical range is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. It may be set. Even when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when setting a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, 1238 which is a reference value as in FIGS. 45 and 46. ~ The range up to the value corresponding to each set value may be set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the smallest, and the jackpot determination value increases as the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. By expanding the non-common numerical range of, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value, while the range is set to the common numerical range. When the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of determination values included is different according to the variation special map, the fluctuation special map is the first in the CPU 103. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit game state using 32767, which is the same value in the case of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure, as a reference value, it is possible to control the small hit game state by the CPU 103. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to use it.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the form in which the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the minimum value of the non-common numerical range is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

Further, in the first embodiment, the CPU 103 can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the common numerical range or the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. It is determined whether or not to control the big hit gaming state based on whether or not the value is, and whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although a mode for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is set to the big hit game state by a method other than that shown in the first embodiment. It may be determined whether or not to control or whether or not to control the small hit game state. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number value MR1 and it may be determined whether or not to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the value of the calculation result. Further, a calculation is performed on the value of the random number value MR1, and a big hit game state or a small hit game is performed based on whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535 which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). It may be determined whether or not to control the state.

(Transformation example B: Transformation example related to restoration of numerical data of random values)
Next, a modification B relating to restoration of numerical data of random values in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47-51. In the modification B, the effect control CPU 120 on the effect control side (also referred to as the sub side) is variable based on the numerical data of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 on the game control side (also referred to as the main side). When the display can be executed, the CPU 103 outputs a specific command obtained by processing the numerical data of the random value MR3 to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 restores the numerical data of the random value MR3 from the received specific command. Then, an example of controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display based on the restored numerical data of the random value MR3 will be mainly described.

On the main board 11, as random numbers used by the CPU 103 for game control, a random number MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern, and a normal map display The random value MR4 for determining the result, the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4, and the like are controlled so as to be countable. The random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters by the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104 as a counter. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The CPU 103 outputs the numerical data of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result at the timing when the start winning prize to the first starting winning opening is detected and the timing when the starting winning to the second starting winning opening is detected. It is possible to extract from the counter and perform hit / fail judgments such as big hit judgment and small hit judgment (including the determination of the stop symbol at the time of small hit determination and the determination of the stop symbol at the time of loss determination) based on the extracted numerical data. is there. The CPU 103 obtains numerical data of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type from the counter at the timing when the start winning to the first start winning opening is detected and the timing when the starting winning to the second starting winning opening is detected. Based on the extracted numerical data, it is possible to perform a jackpot type determination or the like (including determination of a stop symbol for each jackpot type) in which a jackpot type is selected and determined from a plurality of types of jackpot types. The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the counter at the timing when the start winning to the first starting winning opening is detected and the timing when the starting winning to the second starting winning opening is detected. It is possible to process the extracted random number value MR3 and transmit it to the effect control CPU 120.

The random number value MR1, the random number value MR2, and the random number value MR3 extracted at the timing when the start winning is detected are held and stored in the RAM 102 as hold information (hold data). Then, in the CPU 103, the start winning prize was detected for each of the hit / fail determination by the random number value MR1 and the jackpot type determination by the random number value MR2 for the execution of the effect such as the hold look-ahead notice effect on the effect control CPU 120. It is executed at the timing. The fluctuation pattern determination by the random number value MR3 at the timing when the start winning is detected is not executed by the CPU 103, but is executed by the effect control CPU 120 after restoring the processed random number value MR3. After that, at the start timing of the variable display, in order to execute the variable display, based on the hold information of the random value MR1, the random value MR2, and the random value MR3, a hit / fail judgment, a jackpot type judgment, etc. Then, the fluctuation pattern determination is executed.

In the modified example B, when it is decided to make a big hit, a setting in which the big hit type is selected and determined as either "non-probable change" (normal big hit) or "probable change" (probable change big hit) is described as an example. To do.

In the case of a normal big hit, after the end of the big hit game state, the time is shortened (high base state) until the variable display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed in the low probability state (non-probability changing state). .. Such a gaming state is called a low accuracy high base state. After the end of such a time saving state, it is controlled to a low base state (a control state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening) in a low probability state (non-probability change state). Such a gaming state is called a low probability low base state. The initial state at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is basically a low probability and low base state.

In the case of a probability variation jackpot, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, a high probability state (probability variation state) and a time saving state (high base state) are obtained until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Such a gaming state is called a high accuracy and high base state. After the end of such a high accuracy high base state, it is controlled to a low accuracy low base state. In the case of a small hit, the game state does not change before and after the end of the small hit game state.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command in the modified example B. In the modification B, the command C3XXH, the command F0XX, the command F1XX, the command F2XX, and the command F3XX are added to the contents of the effect control command described with reference to FIG. 10A.

The command C3XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and a determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results.

The commands F0XX, command F1XX, command F2XX, and command F3XX are commands 1 to 4 for transmitting random value that notify (transmit) the random value information of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of starting winning. The commands 1 to 4 for transmitting the random value are used to divide the numerical data of the random value MR3 into four and transmit it. The command F4XX is a variable pattern distribution state specification command (a division command that can specify the division of the variable display pattern) that specifies the distribution state of the variable pattern (variable display pattern) at the time of starting winning.

FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining a process relating to conversion and restoration of the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 in the modification B. In the modification B, the conversion process of the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 is executed in the process on the main side by the CPU 103. When the conversion process is executed by the CPU 103, a plurality of commands are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Then, in the sub-side processing by the effect control CPU 120, the restoration processing of the random number value MR3 is executed from a plurality of commands. Specific examples of these processes will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 48, it is assumed that "60,000" is extracted as the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 (range of 0 to 65535). In such a case, in the processing on the main side by the CPU 103, the decimal number is converted from (60,000) D to (EA60) H into a hexadecimal number. Then, the value of each digit of the random number value MR3, which becomes (EA60) H, which is 4-digit numerical data after conversion to a hexadecimal number, is divided into a plurality of (4) and transmitted as commands 1 to 4 for transmitting random value values. To do. For example, by processing each digit of the random number value MR3, which is the 4-digit numerical data of (EA60) H, as F0-00h, F1-06h, F2-0Ah, F3-0Eh, a plurality (4) ) Random value transmission commands 1 to 4 are divided and transmitted.

On the sub side that has received the plurality of random value transmission commands 1 to 4, the lower bit (underlined portion in FIG. 48) is taken out by the effect control CPU 120, and (EA60) H is determined to be (60000) D. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, 0 × 160 + 6 × 161 + A × 162 + E × 163 = 0 × 1 + 6 × 16 + 10 × 256 + 14 × 4096 = 60000 from the extracted lower bit values, and commands 1 to 4 for transmitting random values. The random number MR3 is restored as 60000. In this way, the random number value MR3 is restored by analyzing a plurality of random number value transmission commands 1 to 4 in a predetermined order.

When executing the look-ahead notice, it is possible to execute more types of look-ahead notices in the information related to the fine fluctuation pattern than in the coarse information of only the fluctuation pattern type. However, if the main side determines the detailed information for determining the fluctuation pattern, the capacity of the main side, which has a smaller capacity than that of the sub side, is compressed, and the processing load becomes high. Therefore, the extracted fluctuation pattern judgment random value is converted on the main side and then transmitted to the sub side, and after the fluctuation pattern judgment random value is restored on the sub side, the look-ahead notice is executed to reduce the capacity of the main side. Can be mitigated.

The variation pattern command is a command for specifying a variation pattern (variable display pattern). Therefore, since the fluctuation pattern command can be specified on the sub side, the pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced.

Further, the extracted random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is converted from a decimal number to a hexadecimal number, and the converted value is divided into a plurality of commands 1 to 4 for transmitting random number values. Then, a plurality of random number value transmission commands 1 to 4 are collectively output from the main side to the sub side. As a result, the fluctuation pattern command can be specified on the sub side, so that the pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed as the winning random number value determination process (step S512) shown in FIG. 37 in the modified example B. In the winning random number value determination process of the modified example B shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the probability variation flag or the like provided in the game control flag setting unit or the like, thereby confirming the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The gaming state is specified (step Sc021). The CPU 103 may specify that it is in the probability change state when the probability change flag is on.

Following the process of step Sc022, a process of specifying the fluctuation pattern distribution state is executed (step Sc022). The fluctuation pattern distribution state refers to a state in which distribution of a fluctuation pattern as described below is selected.

When the CPU 103 executes the variable display, it uses a variable pattern table in which the numerical data of the random value MR3 for determining the variable pattern is distributed corresponding to each of a plurality of types of variable patterns, and is extracted at the time of starting winning and stored as pending data. Then, the variation pattern corresponding to the numerical data of MR3 read at the start of the variable display is selected and determined as the variation pattern to be executed.

Regarding the variation pattern table, a plurality of tables having different data contents (selectable variation pattern types, allocation of variation pattern selection, etc.) based on predetermined table selection conditions such as variable display result and reserved storage number are stored in the RAM 102. It is provided in a memorized manner. For example, as the fluctuation pattern table, a probability variation jackpot table used at the time of jackpot determination and probability variation determination, a non-probability variation jackpot time table used at the time of jackpot determination and non-probability variation determination, a loss determination time and a small number of reserved memories (for example, special figure 1 or Hold minority loss table used for holding data of special figure 2 (1 to 3), hold majority loss used when losing is determined and holding storage number is large (for example, 4 holding data of special figure 1 or special figure 2) It includes a time table, a basic loss time table used when determining a loss, regardless of the number of stored memories, and a small hit time table used when determining a small hit.

Such a fluctuation pattern table is classified into a plurality of categories (divisions) and stored in the RAM 102 according to a game state such as a jackpot probability state, a base state, and a progress state of time saving control. For example, the categories of the fluctuation pattern table include the first low probability low base category, the second low probability low base category, the first low probability high base category, the second low probability high base category, and the first high probability high base category. In addition, a second high argument accuracy base category is provided.

The first low-accuracy low-base category is when the number of variable impressions executed during the period during which the low-accuracy low-base state continues (the period that is initialized when a jackpot occurs) is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times). It is a category of the variation pattern table used in. The second low-accuracy low-base category is when the number of variable impressions executed during the period during which the low-accuracy low-base state continues (the period that is initialized when a jackpot occurs) is a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) or more. It is a category of the variation pattern table used in.

The first low probability high base category is a category of the fluctuation pattern table used when the low probability high base state (time saving state after the non-probability change big hit) is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). The second low probability high base category is a category of the fluctuation pattern table used when the low probability high base state (time saving state after the non-probability change big hit) is a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) or more.

The first high-accuracy high-base category is a category of the fluctuation pattern table used when the high-accuracy high-base state (probability change state and time-saving state after the probability change big hit) is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). The second high-accuracy high-base category is a category of the fluctuation pattern table used when the high-accuracy high-base state (probability change state and time-saving state after the probability change big hit) is a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) or more.

In the modified example B, an example will be described in which the tables set as selectable tables in the low base state (non-time saving state) and the high base state (time saving state) are different from the above-mentioned various fluctuation pattern tables. The table set as the table that can be selected in the low base state (non-time saving state) and the high base state (time saving state) may be the same.

Each of the first low probability low base category and the second low probability low base category is based on a combination of a table consisting of a probability variation jackpot table, a non-probability variation jackpot table, a hold minority loss table, and a small hit table. A table that is configured and used to determine the variation pattern is selected according to the gaming state.

The 1st low accuracy high base category, the 2nd low accuracy high base category, the 1st high accuracy high base category, and the 2nd high accuracy high base category are each of the probability variation jackpot table, the non-probability variation jackpot table, and the basic loss. It is composed of a combination of a time table and a table consisting of a small hit time table, and a table used for determining a fluctuation pattern is selected according to a gaming state.

As described above, the fluctuation pattern table used for selecting and determining the fluctuation pattern when executing the variable display is provided for each category according to the game state. Therefore, in order to select and determine the variation pattern when executing the variable display, the variation pattern table according to the gaming state classified (divided) as described above based on the gaming state when executing the variable display. Identify the category of. Then, from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored corresponding to the specified category, the variation pattern according to the game state including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type determination result, the small hit determination result, and the number of reserved storages. A table is selected, and the variation pattern used for the variable display is determined based on the numerical data of the variation pattern determination random value MR3 read from the reserved data using the selected variation pattern table.

In step Sc022, as a process for specifying the fluctuation pattern distribution state, it is included in the current gaming state specified in step Sc021, and is based on the data of the gaming state used to specify the category of the fluctuation pattern table. The process of specifying the category of the fluctuation pattern table is performed.

Next, in order to specify the category of the variation pattern table as the variation pattern distribution state specified in step Sc022, a setting for transmitting the variation pattern distribution state specification command to the effect control board 12 is made (step). Sc023). By receiving the variation pattern distribution state specification command at the time of starting winning, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes the category of the variation pattern determination random value MR3 included in the hold data corresponding to the starting winning at the time of starting winning. can do.

Next, from the table data constituting the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table, special features are provided according to the start port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current gaming state. The table data for determining the special figure display result used for determining the figure display result is selected (step Sc024). The first special figure display result determination table puts the variable display result into a big hit game state as a "big hit" before the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure. In the table referred to for determining whether or not to control and whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. is there. The second special figure display result determination table puts the variable display result into a big hit game state as a "big hit" before the definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure. In the table referred to for determining whether or not to control and whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. is there.

In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, a numerical value (determination) to be compared with the random number value MR1 depending on whether or not the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probabilistic state. The range of value) is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss".

In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), more than when the game state is the normal state (low probability state). The determined value is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability variation state, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state.

It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 extracted in step S509 of FIG. 37 is within the range of the jackpot determination (within the jackpot determination range) (step Sc025). As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a "big hit" based on the variable display based on the reserved data.

If it is determined in step Sc025 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step Sc025; No), the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 extracted in step S509 of FIG. 37 is within the small hit determination range (small). It is determined whether or not it is within the hit determination range (step Sc026). As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a "small hit" based on the variable display based on the reserved data.

If the random number value MR1 is not within the small hit determination range in step Sc026 (step Sc026; No), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result becomes "missing" is transmitted to the effect control board 12. (Step Sc027). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designation command to "00H". At the time of starting winning, the symbol designation command is based on the judgment result of the hit / fail judgment such as the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment, and in addition to the judgment result of the hit / fail judgment such as the big hit, the small hit, and the loss, the judgment result of the big hit type. Is a command that can indicate.

When the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range in step Sc026 (step Sc026; Yes), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result becomes "small hit" is issued to the effect control board 12. And make settings for transmission (step Sc006). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designation command to "03H".

If there is a big hit in step Sc025 (step Sc025; Yes), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type (step Sc028). At this time, the CPU 103 corresponds to the start port buffer value, which is data that can distinguish which of the "first special figure" and the "second special figure" is the start prize at the time of storing the reserved data at the time of the start prize. Varies from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special map (“1st special figure” corresponding to “1” or “2nd special figure” corresponding to “2”). Select the table data for determining the jackpot type corresponding to the special figure. The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referred to for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types such as "non-probability variation" and "probability variation" based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. Table data corresponding to "1 special figure" and table data corresponding to "2nd special figure" are provided, and a variable special figure (a special figure having a variable display) specified corresponding to a "starting port buffer value" is provided. ), One of the data tables is selected and used for jackpot type determination.

Next, a setting is made for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the determination result of the process of step Sc028 to the effect control board 12 (step Sc029). As an example, when it is determined in step Sc028 that the jackpot type is determined to be a "probability variation" jackpot, the EXT data in the symbol designation command is set to "01H", and the jackpot type is determined to be a "non-probability variation" jackpot. If it is determined, the EXT data in the symbol designation command may be set to "02H".

After executing any of the processes of step Sc027, step Sc030, and step Sc029, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 is read from the hold data extracted in step S509 of FIG. 37, and the MR3 is described as described in FIG. Converts the numerical data of the above from decimal to hexadecimal, and divides the value of each digit of the converted hexadecimal numerical data into a plurality of random value transmission commands 1 to 4 (processing of processing the numerical data). (Step Sc031). Then, the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 divided in step Sc031 are set to be collectively transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step Sc032). As a result, the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 processed from the numerical data of MR3 are transmitted by the command control process in step S27 of FIG.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a look-ahead variation pattern command analysis process executed when a specific condition relating to the look-ahead effect is satisfied as the command analysis process (step S75) shown in FIG. 7 in the modification B. The effect control CPU 120 performs a process of analyzing the random number value transmission commands 1 to 4 transmitted by the CPU 103 in step Sc032 of FIG. 49 in the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command analysis process.

The specific conditions related to the look-ahead effect for executing the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command analysis process are as follows. When a start winning is generated, among the effect control commands shown in FIG. 47, the first starting winning opening winning designation command or the second starting winning opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable pattern distribution state designation command, and the first hold storage A plurality of types of commands such as a number notification command, a second hold storage number notification command, and random value transmission commands 1 to 4 are transmitted at the same time. In the command analysis process of step S75 of FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 determines that at least one of a plurality of types of commands transmitted when such a start winning is received is received. The look-ahead variation pattern command analysis process of FIG. 50 is executed on condition that the confirmation is made based on the command data stored in the command reception buffer. As described above, the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command analysis process is an analysis process executed at the time when the start winning is generated.

In the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command analysis process, by checking the command data stored in the effect control command reception buffer, all commands for the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 collectively transmitted in step Sc032 are performed. Is received or not (step Sc041). Random number analysis that restores by analyzing the variation pattern commands divided and transmitted by the random number value transmission commands 1 to 4 in a predetermined order when it is determined that all the commands 1 to 4 for random number value transmission have been received. Execute the module (subroutine) (step Sc042). In the random number analysis module, the restoration process described as the process of restoring the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern on the sub side in FIG. 48 is executed, so that the random number value transmission commands 1 to 4 transmitted separately are varied. The random number value MR3 for pattern determination can be restored.

Next, the random number analysis module (step Sc042) determines whether or not the random number value MR3 is normally restored (step Sc043). In step Sc043, for example, when the restored numerical data of the random value MR3 becomes the numerical data of the predetermined possible numerical range (0 to 65535), the numerical MR3 is normally restored. It is judged. That is, when the numerical value has an abnormal mode other than the predetermined possible numerical range, it is determined to be abnormal.

When it is determined in step Sc043 that the random number value MR3 has been normally restored, the variation pattern distribution set for transmission in step Sc023 of FIG. 49 is confirmed by checking the command data stored in the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not the state specification command has been received (step Sc044). When it is determined in step Sc044 that the variable pattern distribution state specification command has been received, the category of the variable pattern table specified by the received variable pattern distribution state specification command is specified (step Sc045). As a result, the categories of the fluctuation pattern table stored in the RAM 122 (first low accuracy low base category, second low accuracy low base category, first low accuracy high base category, second low accuracy high base category, first high accuracy). From the high base category and the second high argument high base category), the category of the fluctuation pattern table used for selecting and determining the fluctuation pattern regarding the look-ahead effect is selected.

Next, by checking the command data stored in the effect control command reception buffer, it is determined whether or not the symbol designation command to be transmitted from the main board 11 has been received in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize. (Step Sc046). When it is determined in step Sc046 that the symbol designation command has been received, the number of pending storages transmitted is confirmed, and the variation related to the look-ahead effect is selected from the variation pattern tables in the category of the variation pattern table specified in step Sc045. The variable pattern table used to determine the pattern selection is selected.

Next, using the fluctuation pattern table specified in step Sc046, the fluctuation pattern related to the look-ahead effect is selected and determined based on the numerical data of the random value MR3 restored by the random number value analysis module (step Sc042). (Step Sc047). Then, the variation pattern specified in step Sc047 is set by storing the look-ahead variation command in the look-ahead variation command storage area of the RAM 122 as a command to specify the variation pattern related to the look-ahead effect to the effect control CPU 120 (step). Sc048), the process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step Sc041 that at least one of the commands for transmitting random value values 1 to 4 has not been received (when only some commands have been received, when none of the commands have been received, etc.). (Step Sc041), when it is determined in step Sc043 that the random number value MR3 has not been restored normally, and when it is determined in step Sc046 that the symbol designation command has not been received, a start prize is awarded. Since this is a case where an abnormality occurs in the effect control command that is sometimes transmitted, the look-ahead fluctuation error command is set as a command for designating the effect control CPU 120 to the occurrence of the abnormality. It is set by storing in (step Sc049), and the process ends.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed as the look-ahead notice setting process (step S161) shown in FIG. 8 in the modified example B. In the look-ahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the command of the storage area of the RAM 122 set in the look-ahead variation pattern command analysis process (step step Sc061). Then, the entire storage area set this time and the rest of the storage area of the RAM 122 are checked, and it is determined whether or not there is a read-ahead fluctuation error command (step Sc062). The look-ahead fluctuation error command is a command set in step Sc049 of FIG. 50, and is a command set when the command cannot be received normally or the random number value cannot be restored normally. When there is a look-ahead fluctuation error command in the storage area of the RAM 122 (step Sc062; Y), the read-ahead notice is set not to be executed until the variable display corresponding to the stored information of the look-ahead notice error command is completed (step). Sc067), the process is terminated.

When the look-ahead notice error command is stored, even if the stored information generated after the stored information is normal, the look-ahead notice is given until the variable display corresponding to the stored information of the look-ahead notice error command is completed. Should be set not to execute. Then, the look-ahead notice may be permitted by receiving a normal command after the variable display corresponding to the stored information of the look-ahead notice error command is completed. Further, instead of checking the entire storage area of the RAM 122, it may be determined only by whether or not the command set this time is an error. Even in that case, the pre-reading notice may be restricted until the variable display corresponding to the stored information of the command that causes an error is completed.

If there is no look-ahead variation error command in step Sc062 (step Sc062; N), it is determined whether or not the look-ahead notice can be executed (step Sc063). For example, when the storage area of the RAM 122 is confirmed and the look-ahead notice effect has already been executed or the jackpot game state is in effect, it is determined that the look-ahead notice cannot be executed. In these cases as well, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed. If the pre-reading notice cannot be executed in step Sc063, the pre-reading notice is set not to be executed in step Sc067, and the process ends.

When it is determined in step Sc063 that the look-ahead notice can be executed (step Sc063; Y), the look-ahead notice is drawn based on the look-ahead fluctuation command set by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command analysis process described with reference to FIG. (Step Sc064). For example, whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice by the look-ahead variation command, and when executing the look-ahead notice, the details of the effect content of the look-ahead notice effect are determined.

Next, in the process of step Sc065, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the read-ahead notice has been executed. If it is determined in step Sc065 that the read-ahead notice is not executed (step Sc065; N), the process ends. If it is determined in step Sc065 that the look-ahead notice has been executed (step Sc065; Y), the determined look-ahead notice is executed (step Sc066), and the process ends. As a result, the effect control corresponding to the variable display is executed based on the random number value MR3 restored by step Sc042 from the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 in which the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is processed. In step Sc066, the determined look-ahead notice is not immediately executed, but is also included to be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing at the start of fluctuation or the timing during fluctuation).

The case of setting not to execute the look-ahead notice when there is a look-ahead fluctuation error command in the storage area of the RAM 122 (step Sc062; Y) has been described. It may be determined whether or not there is a variation error command, and if there is a look-ahead variation error command, it may be set to limit the execution of the look-ahead notice determined by the lottery.

(Effect of variant B, etc.)
As described above, the commands 1 to 4 for transmitting the random value processed from the numerical data of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern in step Sc031 of FIG. 49 are the command control of step Sc032 in FIG. 49 and step S27 in FIG. Sent by processing. Then, in step Sc042 of FIG. 50, the random number value MR3 is restored from the commands 1 to 4 for transmitting the random number value processed by MR3, and in step Sc066 of FIG. 51, the variable display is made based on the restored random number value MR3. The corresponding effect control is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as a game control means such as the CPU 103.

Further, the effect control command used for the effect control corresponding to the variable display, which is transmitted after being processed by the CPU 103 in step Sc031 of FIG. 49 and restored in step Sc042 of FIG. 50 by the effect control CPU 120, is for transmitting a random number value. It is a command that can specify the fluctuation pattern of commands 1 to 4. As a result, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as a game control means such as the CPU 103.

Further, the commands 1 to 4 for transmitting random numbers are commands configured by converting the extracted random number value M3 from a decimal number to a hexadecimal number and dividing the converted value into a plurality of commands, as shown in FIG. Yes, a plurality of commands are collectively output by step Sc032 in FIG. 49 and step S27 in FIG. In this way, by outputting a plurality of commands at once, the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side as the effect control means such as the effect control CPU 120, so that the pressure on the capacity on the main side such as the CPU 103 is reduced. can do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the random number value MR3 is restored by analyzing a plurality of random number value transmission commands 1 to 4 in a predetermined order in step Sc043 of FIG. Then, as shown in step Sc048 of FIG. 50, the look-ahead fluctuation command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command based on the restored random number value MR3 is stored. As a result, the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by using the variable display pattern command based on the random number value MR3 restored on the sub side such as the effect control CPU 120, so that the capacity of the main side such as the CPU 103 The pressure can be reduced.

Further, by step Sc022, step Sc023 in FIG. 49, and step S27 in FIG. 5, the main side such as the CPU 103 can specify the variable pattern distribution state that can specify the division of the variable display pattern such as the category of the variable pattern table. The command is output to the sub side such as the effect control CPU 120. As a result, the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by outputting a command that can specify the category (variable display pattern classification) of the variable pattern table, so that the pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced. ..

Further, as shown in step Sc027, step Sc029, and step Sc030 of FIG. 49, on the main side such as the CPU 103, it is possible to specify whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot game state. The specified command is output as a command different from the variable pattern distribution status specification command. As a result, information on the most important hit / fail results (big hit judgment result, small hit judgment result) is specified on the main side such as the CPU 103 and output to the sub side such as the effect control CPU 120, thus increasing the safety. Can be done. Further, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by transmitting the symbol designation command, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in steps Sc045 and Sc047 of FIG. 50, a table for determining the variable display pattern is specified based on the variable pattern distribution state designation command and the symbol designation command. As shown in step Sc048 of FIG. 50 and step Sc066 of FIG. 51, the effect corresponding to the variable display is controlled based on the specified table and the restored random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. As a result, the effect corresponding to the variable display is controlled from the table set based on the variable pattern distribution state specification command and the symbol specification command and the restored random number value MR3, so that the pressure on the capacity on the main side is reduced. can do.

Further, as shown in step Sc066 of FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 120 executes a look-ahead effect related to the variable display that triggered the transmission of the variable pattern distribution state designation command as the effect corresponding to the variable display. As a result, the look-ahead effect related to the variable display is executed by specifying the variable display pattern on the sub side such as the effect control CPU 120, so that the pressure on the capacity on the main side such as the CPU 103 can be reduced.

In the modified example B, the case where the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 are collectively transmitted in step Sc032 of FIG. 49 has been described. However, the commands 1 to 4 for transmitting random values may be transmitted one by one instead of being transmitted all at once. Further, when some abnormality occurs in the middle of transmission and all the commands cannot be transmitted, the command related to the error information may be transmitted, or the process may be shifted to the process of stopping the game.

Further, in the modified example B, it has been described that the look-ahead fluctuation command is set in step Sc048 of FIG. 50 and the look-ahead fluctuation error command is set in step Sc049. However, by transmitting a look-ahead variation command based on the variation pattern analyzed in one device to another device, the execution of the look-ahead notice may be determined in the transmitted device.

Further, in the modified example B, a case where it is determined in step Sc063 of FIG. 51 whether or not the look-ahead notice can be executed has been described. However, in step Sc063, if the hold information stored before the determination is executed includes the hold information of the variable display that becomes the reach, it may be determined not to execute the look-ahead notice. Further, even when the hold information of the variable display to be the reach is stored, the look-ahead notice may be executed depending on the type of the look-ahead notice to be executed. For example, if the pre-reading notice to be executed is due to the hold change, the look-ahead notice due to the hold change may be executed even when the hold information of the variable display to be reached is stored.

Further, in the modification B, a plurality of processing methods for the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be provided. Then, MR3 may be restored by transmitting information on the processing method of the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 from the main side to the sub side.

Further, in the modified example B, the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern was set in the range of 0 to 65535. However, the range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be smaller or larger than this.

Further, in the modified example B, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is processed in the special symbol normal processing in the same manner as in the start winning, and the random number value transmission commands 1 to 4 are transmitted from the main side, and the sub side sends the commands 1 to 4. The fluctuation pattern may be specified by performing the random number restoration process.

(Modification example C: Modification example in which the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in the common storage area)
Further, in the first embodiment, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set separately in the game control flag setting unit 152 (that is, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set in different storage areas. ) However, the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the big hit flag and the small hit flag may not be set in separate storage areas, but may be set in a common storage area to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main board (main board 11). .. Hereinafter, as a modification C of the first embodiment, an example in which the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in a common storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 52.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal processing in the modified example C. In addition, in FIG. 52, a part different from the special symbol normal processing of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 39 is excerpted and described. Further, in the modification C, both when the big hit flag is set and when the small hit flag is set, it is set in the common storage area of the game control flag setting unit 152, and this common storage area is set. This is referred to as a common buffer, and the flag set in the common buffer (big hit flag or small hit flag) is referred to as a common flag. In the modification C, whether it is a big hit flag or a small hit flag is determined by the value of the common flag (“1” or “2”) set in the common buffer.

After executing the process of step S557 described above with reference to FIG. 39, the CPU 103 resets (erases) the stored contents of the common buffer (step S557A). Specifically, the value indicating "0" is overwritten as the value of the common flag set in the common buffer. As will be described later, the value "0" of the common flag is also a value indicating that it is "off".

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a big hit in the variable display in the process of step S557 (step S557B), and if it is determined to be a big hit (step S557B; Y), it is set in the common buffer. The value indicating "1" is overwritten as the value of the common flag (step S557C). Therefore, if the value of the common flag is "1", it means that it is a "big hit", and it can be said that the common flag "1" is a big hit flag.

When it was determined that it was not a big hit (step S557B; N), the CPU 103 confirmed whether or not it was determined to be a small hit in the variable display in the process of step S557 (step S557D), and determined that it was a small hit. In that case (step S557D; Y), the value indicating "2" is overwritten as the value of the common flag set in the common buffer (step S557E). Therefore, if the value of the common flag is "2", it means that it is a "small hit", and it can be said that the common flag "2" is a small hit flag.

When it is determined that the hit is not a small hit (step S557D; N), the CPU 103 overwrites the value indicating "0" as the value of the common flag set in the common buffer (step S557F). Therefore, the value of the common flag of "0" indicates that it is "off". Since the value of the common flag is set to "0" due to the reset of the common buffer in step S557A, "0" may not be set again (that is, the process of step S557F is not executed). ..

After executing the process of step S557E, after executing the process of step S557F, or after executing the process of step S557C and then executing the process of steps S562 to S564 described above with reference to FIG. 39, the CPU 103 The confirmed special symbol is stored in a predetermined storage area in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S557G). At this time, when the value of the common flag stored in the common buffer is "0", the CPU 103 stores the information of the "missing symbol" as the definite special symbol, and the value of the common flag stored in the common buffer is "1". When "", the information of "big hit symbol" is stored as a confirmed special symbol, and when the value of the common flag stored in the common buffer is "2", the information of "small hit symbol" is stored as a confirmed special symbol. In any case, the information of any of the confirmed special symbols is stored in the common storage area (same area) in the game control buffer setting unit 155. The information of the confirmed special symbol is not limited to the information of the symbol type such as "missing symbol", "big hit symbol", and "small hit symbol", but may be the information of the symbol random number, and the lottery result based on the symbol random number. It may be the information of the above, or it may be a random number for display used for the seg display (display in the game information display unit 200).

After executing the process of step S557G, the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S566 and S567 described above with reference to FIG. 39 to end the special symbol normal process.

(Effect of variant C, etc.)
As described above, in the modified example C, since the big hit flag and the small hit flag are discriminated by the value of the common flag and stored in the common buffer, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are separately provided and stored in different storage areas. It is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side rather than memorizing it. Further, since the LD instruction and the like can be reduced as compared with LD (loading) the separate big hit flag and small hit flag, the pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced. In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the setting function described in the first embodiment, the capacity of the main side (main board 11) is compressed by having the setting function. Therefore, the modified example C becomes more effective when applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 having such a setting function.

Further, in the modification C, the big hit flag (common flag "1") and the small hit flag (common flag "2") are determined by the value of the common flag and stored in the common buffer, so that both are set at the same time. Can't happen. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of bugs in the game machine and the act of goto.

Further, in the modified example C, as shown in the process of step S557G, the information of the definite special symbol is also stored in the common storage area, so that the capacity on the main side is compressed as compared with the case where the information is stored separately. Can be mitigated.

In the modified example C, the common buffer big hit flag (common flag "1") or the small hit flag (common flag "common flag") depends on whether the result of the variable display is a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing. 2 ”) was assumed to be set, but when the process of pre-reading the variable display result (pre-reading determination process) is executed in the start winning determination process of step S101 shown in FIG. 6, the pre-reading determination result is common. It may not be stored in the buffer. That is, in the look-ahead determination process, even if the result of the variable display is pre-read, the information of the pre-reading determination result is produced and controlled without setting a common flag (big hit flag, small hit flag, etc.) based on the determination result in the common buffer. It may be transmitted to the substrate 12 (sub side). By doing so, the risk of setting common flags in the special symbol normal processing and the look-ahead determination processing in a mixed manner is reduced, so that the risk of bugs and irregularities can be reduced.

Further, in the modified example C, as shown in step step S557A, the value of the common flag is stored in the common buffer before the value of the common flag is set based on the determination of whether the result of the variable display is a big hit or a small hit. The value of the common flag is reset (it is reset to the value "0" indicating the loss). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that an unintended value is set in the common buffer.

Further, in the modified example C, as shown in steps S557B and S557D, it is determined first whether or not a big hit is obtained, and if it is determined that a large hit is obtained, it is not determined whether or not a small hit is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to compress the program by omitting unnecessary processing. In the modified example C, it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit first, and if it is determined that the hit is a big hit, it is not determined whether or not the hit is a small hit. If it is determined that it will be a small hit, it may not be determined whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the modified example C, the common flag (value "1" indicating a big hit, value "2" indicating a small hit, or value "0" indicating a loss) stored in the common buffer is used in the special symbol normal processing. (For example, it is used when determining the type of the definite special symbol in step S557G), but it can also be used for other processes. For example, the variation pattern setting process in step S111 shown in FIG. 6 includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on the determination of whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit. However, it is sufficient that the common buffer is referred to in this determination. Similarly, in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. 6, the game state is updated based on the determination of whether the result of the variable display is a big hit or a small hit (for example, a big hit game or a small hit game). Is included, and the time saving state and the probability change state are terminated), but the common buffer may be referred to at the time of this determination. In this way, since the information of the common flag set in the common buffer can be used in a plurality of processes, it is possible to further enhance the effect of compressing the capacity on the main side.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a setting function capable of setting a set value as described in the first embodiment, but a configuration in which a setting function is added to a so-called type 1 type 2 type specification game machine. It may be. In addition, a game machine with specifications of 1 type and 2 types is a big hit (so-called first hit) as a result of the first special figure game in the normal state (low base state), so that the time is shortened (high) after the big hit game is completed. It is controlled to the base state), and as a result of the second special figure game in the time saving state, a small hit is obtained, and in the small hit game state, the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a game machine with a game-like property that makes a big hit (so-called consecutive villas). Further, at this time, while the jackpot winning probability in the special figure game (first special figure game and second special figure game) is different depending on the set value, the special figure game (at least the second special figure game) is different regardless of the set value. The odds of winning a small hit in the figure game) may be the same. In this way, at the time of the first hit, the probability of becoming a big hit will be affected by the difference in the set value, but since the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value, at the time of consecutive villas, the big hit will be due to the difference in the set value. The probability of becoming (passing a predetermined switch during a small hit) is not affected. Therefore, even if there is a high possibility that the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the setting function has a low setting, it is possible to reduce the influence of the difference in the set value and maintain the interest of the game. Further, in a game machine having a type 1 or type 2 type specification equipped with such a setting function, the frequency of small hits increases in a short time state after the first hit. Therefore, by applying the modified example C to such a type 1 type 2 spec type game machine, even if the frequency of small hits is high, a small hit flag different from the big hit flag is LD ( Since there is no need to load), LD instructions and the like can be reduced, and pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced.

Although the modified example C is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment, it may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified example A and the modified example B. It can also be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment described later.

(Modification example D: Modification example in which timer update processing is shared)
Further, in the first embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating a plurality of types of timer values, but a plurality of timer update processes for updating (subtracting) the set timer values are performed. It may be executed as a common process so that it can be used in the process of. Hereinafter, as a modification D of the first embodiment, an example in which the timer update process is shared will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control timer interrupt processing in the modified example D. Note that FIG. 53 is an excerpt of a portion different from the game control timer interrupt processing described with reference to FIG.

After executing the processes of steps S21 to S24 described above with reference to FIG. 5, the CPU 103 executes a timer update process of subtracting the set timer value (step S25A). The data indicating the timer value is set in each process described later (for example, variation pattern setting process, special symbol variation process, special symbol stop process), so that a plurality of types of timer values can be set in the game control timer setting unit 153. However, the timer update process for subtracting the timer value is standardized and executed by the timer update process in step S25A regardless of the timer value. After executing the process of step S25A, the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S25 to S27 described above with reference to FIG. 5 to end the game control timer interrupt process.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in the modified example D. In FIG. 54, a part different from the special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 6 will be excerpted and described.

As shown in FIG. 54, the CPU 103 executes the second zero flag update process (step S100) before executing the process of step S101 described with reference to FIG. 6. Specifically, the CPU 103 updates the second zero flag by reading the timer value updated in the timer update process (step S25A) of FIG. 53. Here, the second zero flag is a flag that is updated to "1" when the read value (data) is "0", and the content of the second zero flag is updated by the subroutine read by the Call instruction and then updated. The contents are retained even if the original processing is returned. Therefore, when the timer value updated (subtracted) in the timer update process becomes "0", the second zero flag is updated to "1". In the modified example D, the second zero flag is updated instead of the zero flag by reading the timer value. This is due to the following reasons. That is, since the zero flag is a flag indicating whether or not the operation result is "0", the operation for updating the zero flag has more codes than the LD (load) instruction for updating the second zero flag. Therefore, in the modification D, the processing is compressed by updating the second zero flag instead of the zero flag. Although the compression effect is reduced, the zero flag may be updated by calculation instead of updating the second zero flag by reading the timer value.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (see step S111 in FIG. 6) in the modified example D.

In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1111). When the jackpot flag is set (step S1111; Y), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot variation pattern using the jackpot variation pattern determination table (step step S1112).

When the big hit flag is not set (step S1111; N), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S1113). When the small hit flag is set (step S1113; Y), the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern for small hits using the fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits (step S1114). When the small hit flag is not set (step S1113; N), the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern for disconnection using the variation pattern determination table for disconnection (step S1115).

After the processing of steps S1112, S1114, or S1115, the CPU 103 issues a symbol variation designation command (effect control command) indicating that the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Control to transmit to 12 (step S1116).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a variation pattern designation command (effect control command) for designating the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of steps S1112, S1114, or S1115 to the effect control board 12 (step S1117). ).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time as data indicating the timer value of the special figure fluctuation time timer (step S1118). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S1119), which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (see step S112 in FIG. 6), and the variation pattern setting process is completed.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (see step S112 in FIG. 6) in the modified example D.

In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the second zero flag is 1 (step S1121). As for the second zero flag, as described above, when the timer value updated in the timer update process (step S25A in FIG. 53) becomes “0”, the second zero flag update process (step S100 in FIG. 54) is executed. By doing so, it is updated to "1". Therefore, when the value of the second zero flag is "1", it means that the timer value has reached "0" (timed out).

The timer value for determining whether or not the process has reached "0" (timed out) in the process of step S1121 of the special symbol variation process is the process before shifting to the special symbol variation process (the special symbol process flag is 2). It is a timer value (variation time) set in the variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 55), which is the process before being updated to (see step S1118). However, this timer value (variation time) is updated (subtracted) by executing the timer update process (see step S25A) in the game control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 53) instead of the special symbol variation process. .. Therefore, the timer value can be updated by the common timer update process regardless of which process (for example, the special symbol variation process) is used (that is, the type of timer). Further, the second zero flag update process (see step S100) for updating the second zero flag is executed in the special symbol process process (see FIGS. 6 and 54) in which the special symbol variation process can be called as a subroutine. Therefore, the processing can be compressed rather than updating the second zero flag in each subroutine (for example, special symbol variation processing) called in the special symbol process processing.

When the second zero flag is 1 (that is, when the timer value (variation time) times out (step S1121; Y)), the CPU 103 ends the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second When the special symbol display device 4B is controlled to derive and display the stopped symbol (step S1122) and the second zero flag is not 1 (that is, when the timer value (variation time) has not timed out (step S1121; N)), The CPU 103 ends the special symbol variation process.

After the process of step S1122, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command (effect control command) indicating to stop the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to the effect control board 12. (Step S1123).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as data indicating the timer value of the special figure fluctuation stop time timer (step S1124). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" (step S1125), which is a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (see step S113 in FIG. 6), and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (see step S113 in FIG. 6) in the modified example D.

In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the second zero flag is 1 (step S1131). As for the second zero flag, as described above, when the timer value updated in the timer update process (step S25A in FIG. 53) becomes “0”, the second zero flag update process (step S100 in FIG. 54) is executed. By doing so, it is updated to "1". Therefore, when the value of the second zero flag is "1", it means that the timer value has reached "0" (timed out).

The timer value for determining whether or not the process has reached "0" (timed out) in the process of step S1131 of the special symbol stop process is the process before shifting to the special symbol stop process (the special symbol process flag is 3). It is a timer value (symbol determination time) set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 56), which is the process before being updated to (see step S1124). However, this timer value (symbol determination time) is updated (subtracted) by executing the timer update process (see step S25A) in the game control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 53) instead of the special symbol stop process. To. Therefore, the timer value can be updated by the common timer update process regardless of which process (for example, the special symbol stop process) is used (that is, the type of timer). Further, the second zero flag update process (see step S100) for updating the second zero flag is executed in the special symbol process process (see FIGS. 6 and 54) in which the special symbol stop process can be called as a subroutine. Therefore, the processing can be compressed rather than updating the second zero flag in each subroutine (for example, special symbol stop processing) called in the special symbol process processing.

When the second zero flag is 1 (that is, when the timer value (variation time) times out (step S1131; Y)), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1132), and then the third 2 When the zero flag is not 1 (that is, when the timer value (variation time) has not timed out (step S1131; N)), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process.

When the jackpot flag is set (step S1132; Y), the CPU 103 is set with a probability change flag indicating that it is in a probability change state and a time reduction flag indicating that it is in a time reduction state (high base state). If so, the flag is reset (step S1133), and a hit start designation command (effect control command) for designating the start of the big hit game state is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step step S1134).

After the processing of S1134, the CPU 103 sets the time during which the fanfare effect is executed as data indicating the timer value of the fanfare time timer (step S1135). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step S1136), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (see step S114 of FIG. 6), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

When the big hit flag is not set (step S1132; N), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S1137), and when the small hit flag is set (step S1137). In Y), the CPU 103 controls to transmit a small hit start designation command (effect control command) for designating the start of the small hit game state to the effect control board 12 (step step S1138).

After the process of S1138, the CPU 103 sets the time during which the fanfare effect of the small hit game is executed as data indicating the timer value of the fanfare time timer of the small hit game (step S1139). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step S1140), which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (see step S118 in FIG. 6), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

When the small hit flag is not set (step S1137; N), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step step S1141). When the probability change flag is set (step S1141; Y), the process proceeds to step S1147, and when the probability change flag is not set (step S1141; N), the CPU 103 is in the time saving state. It is confirmed whether or not the indicated time saving flag is set (step S1142). When the time saving flag is not set (step S1142; N), the process proceeds to step S1147, and when the time saving flag is set (step S1142; Y), the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time saving state. The value of the time reduction counter indicating is -1 (step S1143). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (step S1144), and if the value of the time reduction counter has not become 0 (step S1144; N), the process is step S1147. When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (step S1144; Y), the time reduction flag is reset (step S1145), and the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed is entered. Control is performed to transmit the corresponding first game state designation command (effect control command) to the effect control board 12 (step S1146). Next, in the process of step S1147, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (see step S110 of FIG. 6), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

(Effect of variant D, etc.)
As described above, in the modified example D, in the plurality of different processes of the special symbol change process and the special symbol stop process, the processes are executed based on the second zero flag, and the second zero flag is updated. The timer value is different for each of the plurality of processes, but all of them are updated by a common timer update process executed prior to the plurality of processes. That is, in the modified example D, since the timer values used in the plurality of processes can be updated by one common process (timer update process of FIG. 53), the processes can be compressed and the main side (main board 11) can be compressed. ) Capacity pressure can be reduced.

In the modified example D, the special symbol variation process and the special symbol variation process are used as a plurality of processes in which the timer value updated by the common timer update process (or the second zero flag updated based on the timer value) is used. Although an example of the symbol stop processing has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be used in the big hit opening pre-processing (S114) and the big hit opening processing (S115) shown in FIG. Also in this case, as in the modified example D, the timer value for determining whether or not the process has become “0” (timed out) in each process is the process before shifting to each process (for example, before the jackpot is released). If it is a process, each process is executed based on the setting in the special symbol stop process) and the timer value being updated by one common process (timer update process of FIG. 53).

Further, in the modified example D, as the timer value updated by the timer update process of FIG. 53, a special figure fluctuation time timer, a special figure stop time timer, and the like are mentioned, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Specifically, a timer for changing the normal figure to measure the execution time of the variable display of a normal symbol, a timer for outputting a security signal for measuring the output time of a security signal, a timer for payout control communication, and always driving. A plurality of types of timer values, such as a timer for monitoring the motor to be used, may be updated by a common timer update process. In this way, by updating a plurality of types of timer values with a common timer update process, the updated multiple types of timer values can be used in a plurality of processes, so that the process can be further compressed and the main. It is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the side (main board 11).

Further, in the modification D, the timer update process (see FIG. 53) is updated in the special symbol process process (see FIGS. 6 and 54) in which the special symbol change process and the special symbol stop process can be called as subroutines, respectively. The second zero flag is updated by reading the timer value (the second zero flag update process of FIG. 54 is executed), and the process differs depending on whether or not the value of the second zero flag is "1" (for example, special). In the symbol variation processing, the stopped symbol is derived and displayed, and the processing is looped (standby)). In this way, instead of updating the second zero flag in each process called by the subroutine (special symbol change process or special symbol stop process), the second zero flag is updated by the caller's process (special symbol process process). Since the updated information of the second zero flag is used in a plurality of processes called by the subroutine, the processes can be compressed and the pressure on the capacity of the main board (main board 11) can be reduced.

In addition, the modification D may be applied to a game machine having specifications of one type and two types. As mentioned above, in a game machine with 1 type and 2 type specifications, the frequency of small hits is high in the short time state after the first hit, so in the special symbol process processing, the subroutine related to small hits (small hit opening pre-processing, The small hit opening process and the small hit end process) are called more frequently (see FIG. 6). Therefore, by applying the modification D to such a type 1 and type 2 spec type gaming machine, even if the subroutine related to the small hit is called frequently, the timer value used in the subroutine is one. Since it is updated by the timer update process, the compression efficiency of the process is high, and the pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced.

Although the modified example C is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment, it may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified example A and the modified example B. It can also be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment described later.

(Second Embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description will be described. In the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a setting function capable of setting a set value and capable of being controlled in a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state will be described.

First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58-1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-mentioned basic description with reference to FIG. 1 in that the configurations of the special variable winning ball device 7 and the variable winning ball device 6B are different and new. The difference is that the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided in the. The different points will be described below.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a large winning opening is provided below the passing gate 41. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state (also called an open state) in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which the game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided, and FIG. 58 As shown in -1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 has a bottom member in a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state of being moved forward toward the front, and the opening control is executed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed so as to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, a game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is dropped. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the ball moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below the ball.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, so that the special variable winning ball device 17 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the variable winning ball device 6B faces the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B from the upper right to the lower left. I will move. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the variable winning ball device does not win the special variable winning ball device 7. For the game ball that has fallen on 6B, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is open, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and is specially variable. The game ball does not flow toward the winning ball device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 58-1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

A switch that can detect a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed and controlled and the large winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

In the special winning opening, a switch that can detect the winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the switch, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of prize balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) other prize openings such as the first start winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Next, the gaming state in the second embodiment will be described. The gaming state in the second embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and the gaming state is controlled to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). , Low probability and controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), high probability and controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state), high probability and controlled to the second KT It may be controlled to a state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in the second embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. The ratio of small hits is low when the first special symbol changes, while the ratio of small hits is high when the second special symbol changes (however, it will be described later). (Except for the case of forced loss), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, in the second embodiment, the time required from the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is set to be 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. As will be described in detail later, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41. In the first KT state described later, the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The time from when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the first KT state, the one game ball remains as it is. It is possible to win a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
58-2 and 58-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 58-2 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 58-3 shows the jackpot probability and the minor hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 58-2. In the example shown in FIG. 58-2 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability "247/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 58-2 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability "2470/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 58-2 (A) and 58-2 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability changing state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "6298/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. As shown in FIGS. 58-2 (A) and 58-2 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. Is different in the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

Next, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 58-3. In the example shown in FIG. 58-3 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability "247/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 58-3 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability "2470/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 58-3 (A) and 58-3 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). Regardless of whether it is a probabilistic state (high probability state) or a probabilistic state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant as "62986/65536". That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 58-3), the small hit is compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 58-2). The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). As shown in FIGS. 58-3 (A) and 58-3 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. Is different in the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3, the determination values corresponding to the deviations are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 58). -2 and as shown in FIG. 58-3, there is no set value at which the probability of loss is 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3, depending on which of the set values "1" to "6". , The probability of loss is different).

In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the probability of loss is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to loss). For example, at the set value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the loss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

Further, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a judgment value that does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (FIG. 58-2), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small hit is not included. Good.

In addition, in FIGS. 58-2 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 58-3 (A) and (B), the small hit probability is the same between the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the off-probability is different, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot probability is higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state), so the small hit probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the probability of loss. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched respectively. As a result, in a game machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6 or a game machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a game machine of a type having a setting change function in 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration. Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
58-4 (A) and 58-4 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot" based on the random number for hit type determination. It is a table referred to for determining one of "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", "9R probability variation jackpot", or "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 58-4 (A), in the second embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". , 9% probability is determined as "16R probability variation jackpot", 56% probability is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "6R normal jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 58-4 (B), in the second embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be a "16R probability variation jackpot" with a 10% probability, a "9R probability variation jackpot" with a 50% probability, a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 5% probability, and a 35% probability. It is decided as "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "9R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 9 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In the second embodiment, when "16R probability variation jackpot", "9R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot" are obtained, a predetermined period (in this example) in each round of the jackpot game. , 30 seconds) or until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls wins, the big prize openings are controlled to be open, and up to 10 large prize openings can be won in each round. It is possible. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of prizes in the large prize openings that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The method of transitioning the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIGS. 58-29).

(Small hit type judgment table)
58-5 (A) and 58-5 (B) are explanatory views showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to "small hit A" or "small hit B" based on the random number for determining the hit type. , Or a table referenced to determine either "small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 58-5 (A), in the second embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", , 100% probability of being determined as "small hit A". Further, as shown in FIG. 58-5 (B), in the second embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be "small hit B" with a 70% probability and "small hit C" with a 30% probability.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 58-10), and the small hit game. You can hardly expect a game ball to win a special prize inside. In the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 58-11), and the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 58-12), and the game ball wins the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected most.

(Variation pattern table)
58-6 to 58-8 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the second embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 58-6 to 58-8 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 58-6 to 58-8, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 58-6 (A). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-6 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if it is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), it is shown in FIG. 58-6 (B). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol shown for KT is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-6 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 58-7 (C). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-7 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In the second embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain prize ball can be expected by winning the game ball to the special prize opening. It will occur. Therefore, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58-7 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the fluctuation display is executed. By reducing the frequency, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize ball is targeted by a small hit even in a non-KT state. In the second embodiment, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of hits is higher than in the normal state.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58-7 (C), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation is changed even if it is a big hit. By making the time relatively long, 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 58-7 (D) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-7 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 58-7 (D), when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. It is determined. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. The variation pattern for preparation) is determined. In the second embodiment, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but the variable winning ball device 6B is actually specially variable by lengthening the opening time. The special winning opening in the winning ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 17 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the first variation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are secured before the transition to the first KT state by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member of the player fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state. Further, when the big hit is determined as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is executed, FIG. 58-7 (Fig. 58-7). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and the 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in E) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 58-7 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 13 It is decided to be one. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-7 (E), when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # It may be determined by 07 or the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation whose fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of range, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second variation pattern # 11 of the shortened variation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 07 and # 10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 08 and # 11 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 58-7 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-7 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Will be decided.

In the second embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 58-7 (F), when it is determined that the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, a character display such as "chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 14 or the second fluctuation pattern # 15 accompanied by the end display. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-7 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as "chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern # 16 is determined with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58-6, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds, and the first fluctuation pattern # 07 Is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in the second embodiment, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it is possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured in.

In addition, unlike the second embodiment, even when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first configuration). 1 Big hit of special symbol If the game machine is a game machine with the 2nd special symbol changing when the 2 special symbol is stopped, the 2nd special symbol is forcibly removed) The time may be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 9R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 58-8 (G) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-8 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. Will be decided.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 58-8 (G), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 17 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-8 (G), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 9R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 58-8 (H) The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations shown in) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 58-8 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 22 to # 28 Is decided.

As in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 58-8 (H), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / 1st KT state are out of order, as shown in FIG. The second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is shortened to 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 25, and the fluctuation time is further shortened to 1 second. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 26 of the fluctuation. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 23 and # 26 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 58-8 (I) is displayed. It is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-8 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. ..

As shown in FIG. 58-8 (I), when it is determined that the deviation is out of the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of the normal fluctuation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 31 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 32 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the fluctuation time is usually 5 seconds. The second fluctuation pattern # 33 of the fluctuation may be determined. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, it depends on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using the variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number for determining the variation pattern, and which variation pattern is used is determined. FIG. 58-9 is for determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 58-8 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 58-9, in the second embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, and the variation display which is a small hit is executed. Is determined to be the second variation pattern # 32 with a probability of 70% and the second variation pattern # 33 with a probability of 30% regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6". .. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is selected.

Note that FIG. 58-9 shows, as an example, a variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state, but FIGS. 58-6 to 58-8 show. The other variation pattern tables shown are also configured in the same manner, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 58-7 to 58-9, the shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and the shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is highly probable in the case of the second KT state. It shows the case where it is configured to be executed in, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 58-10 to 58-12 are explanatory views for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 58-10 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. Further, FIG. 58-11 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. Further, FIG. 58-12 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. Further, FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIGS. 58-10 (2) show. ~ FIG. 58-12 (2) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1). As shown in FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, it is normal in the normal symbol display 20. When the variable display of the symbol is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Will be done. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the winning symbol and the missing symbol are derived and displayed. The confirmation time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1), the second start winning opening is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, as shown in FIG. 58-10 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 58-11 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. 58 As shown in -12 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of small hit A, it becomes possible to win a prize. , Since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, almost no winning can be expected). However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 58-10 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds, or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1), the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed. Is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 0.1 seconds is there. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. , After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, has passed, and the game ball It is configured that the time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state in the state where the normal symbol is not changed is longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already open. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12 (2). As shown in FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, it is normal in the normal symbol display 20. When the variable display of the symbol is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Will be done. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the hit symbol and the missed symbol are derived and displayed. The confirmation time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12 (2), the second start winning opening is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 58-10 (2). In the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 58-11 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. 58 As shown in -12 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the second embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol determination time). A relatively long period of 0.2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. Compared to the first KT state, the game ball is more likely to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball is more likely to win the special winning opening. However, in the case of the small hit A, since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for 0.2 seconds, which is extremely short, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the special winning opening even in the second KT state.

In the second KT state, the game ball is easily won in the special winning opening and the prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and in the second KT state, "small hit RUSH". Character display such as "is displayed.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is different depending on which of the small hit types A to C is used. I can't be limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be different depending on which of the small hits A to C is the small hit type. In this case, for example, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of small hit B or small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) can be opened by executing the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 four times for 0.4 seconds. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win a prize to some extent, and various modes can be considered. Further, in this example, the case where the small hit types are three types of small hits A to C is shown, but the case is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more types of small hit types are configured to be provided. May be good.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. , After the lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol of 1.0 second, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 2.6 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, the game ball Is configured to take about 0.6 seconds from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled by. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In the second embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) in the normal symbol process. It is performed by executing the process (see step step S26). Further, in the normal symbol process process of step step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether or not the game is a big hit game, the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%) is used to determine whether or not the game is a normal hit.

In the second embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the same. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the first KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown. Not limited. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different depending on the device. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

In the second embodiment, as will be described later, in the first KT state, by controlling the high base state by setting a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, FIGS. 58-10 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 58-12 (1), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. Further, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12 (2) by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag. It is controlled so that the time is shortened.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-. The variable winning ball device 6B as shown in 12 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12. The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, out of the 50 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the low probability / first KT state is completed. be able to.

In addition, as described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 to 58-12, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate By the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open, and the special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in the second embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is used after the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Since the opening is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

58-13 and 58-14 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the second embodiment. In the example shown in FIGS. 58-13, the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (9R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 9R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 8 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In the second embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command. Can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second special symbol. The result designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but 15R probability variation jackpot / 9R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined in correspondence with the above, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the right-handed lamp 132 has been turned on. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed lamp 132 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start prize designation command, but the second execution In the form, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for designating the currently set setting value. A set value is set in "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 58-13 and 58-14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. It should be noted that the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 58-13 and 58-14 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

Next, the special symbol process processing in the second embodiment will be described. In the special symbol process process of the second embodiment, in addition to each process in the special symbol process process described above with reference to FIG. 6, a gate passage waiting process is provided. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41, the details of which will be described later. In the second embodiment, as an explanation of the special symbol process process, the first special symbol process process relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol process process relating to the second special symbol will be described separately. .. Therefore, each process in the special symbol process process (for example, special symbol normal process, etc.) will be described separately from the process related to the first special symbol and the process related to the second special symbol. In the following description, it is assumed that the first ... process indicates the process related to the first special symbol, and the second ... process indicates the process related to the second special symbol.

FIG. 58-15 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal processing in the first special symbol process processing. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing, it means that the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol. This is the case when neither the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S51A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. (Step S53A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the 1st reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first hold storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step S55A). In this example, by executing the process of step S55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step S56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. The probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability / first KT, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, the command is high probability / first KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT state is determined and the high accuracy / second KT background specification command is executed. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S69A without performing the processing after step S58A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step S59A to obtain a start winning prize. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step S57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processes of steps S58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step S58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot based on the hit type determination random number (step S62A), the jackpot type is stored (step S63A), and step S69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step S60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step S64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step S65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S65A). Step S66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the hit type determination random number (step S67A), and stores the small hit type (step S68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit A (see FIG. 58-5 (A)). Then, the process proceeds to step S69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step S69A), and if it is "0", step S75A. Move to. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step S70A). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step S71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step S72A), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step S73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step S74A). Then, the process proceeds to step S75A.

In the second embodiment, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed at the end of the 6R normal jackpot or the jackpot game based on the 2R normal jackpot. This is a case where the fluctuation display is executed 50 times under the control of the probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state). In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps S71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps S72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time reduction flag is also reset in steps S73A and S73B, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation shortening common to the first KT state. It is a flag for making the production background common to the first KT state while keeping the state.

Then, in step S75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S75A is determined.

In step S59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 58-16 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, first, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set with the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. (Step S1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (FIG. 58-6). (See FIG. 58-8), since a small hit is likely to occur, the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58-6 (A) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step S1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 58-6 (B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step S1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps S1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 58-6 is used (step S1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step S1705A), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step S1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step S1707A).

FIG. 58-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first determines one of the display result specification commands (display result) based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the decision result of the big hit type if it has not been transmitted yet. (1 designated command, display result 2 designated command, display result 4 designated command, display result 5 designated command) are controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1120A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step S1121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S1122A), controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1122A). Step S1123A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S1127A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step S1124A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step S1125A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is obtained is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step S1124A), or if the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step S1125A), the CPU 103 is the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to (step S1126A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S1127A).

By executing the processes of steps S1124A and S1125A, in the second embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special The variable display of the symbol is forcibly stopped so that a big hit or a small hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the variation display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step S1124A. It is controlled so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

If neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (N in step S1124A, N in step S1125A), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 58-18 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step S2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step S2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2012A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, the person who performs the right-handed operation when the game state is controlled to the KT state. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed lamp 132 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed lamp 132 is turned on during the low probability / first KT state, but the 50th variation display is started by executing the processes of steps S69A to S74A and S69B to S74B. At the same time, the low probability / first KT state is terminated to shift to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processes of steps S2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B are executed to end the 50th variation display. Sometimes the right-handed lamp 132 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step S2014A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step S2015A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 indicates that the jackpot signal 1 (a signal indicating that a jackpot game is in progress) and the jackpot signal 2 (a signal indicating that a consecutive villa is in progress) are output externally. The jackpot signal output flag is set (step S2017A). In the second embodiment, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in step S2017A, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and the jackpot signal is signaled. If the external output of 2 is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S2018A), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S2019A), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step S2020A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2021A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S2022A).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S2023A).

By executing the processes of steps S2021A and S2022A, in this example, the right-handed lamp 132 is started to light when a big hit is made in the variation display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game, and the right side. The striking lamp 132 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. It may be configured to start lighting the lamp 132.

If the first big hit flag is not set (N in step S2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step S2024A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S2025A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first small hit opening preprocessing (step S2029A).

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. However, as already explained, when a small hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only a small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the first special symbol, the right-handed lamp 132 is not turned on and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

If the first small hit flag is not set (N in step S2024A), the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step S2030A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. You may be.

In addition, right-handed notification and launch promotion notification are not executed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, and right-handed notification and launch promotion notification are performed when a game ball wins in the first start winning opening in that state. (In this case, since the gate is waiting to pass through, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first hold memory is set). It may be configured as.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Therefore, the player may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to launch and operate the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, loud sound output or It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by (large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , The player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, when the number of game balls detected at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number, left-handed notification may be performed. Further, when the passing gate 41 detects a game ball a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. It may be configured to give a left-handed notification when a small number (for example, one) or more of game balls are detected.

Further, for example, the detection of the game ball at the passing gate 41 does not output an external signal, while the detection of the game ball at the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is configured to output an external signal. You may.

In the second embodiment, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passing gate 41, the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

FIG. 58-19 is a flowchart showing the first gate passage waiting process in the first special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step S2501A). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special figure time reduction flag, which indicates that the state is in the probability change state, if set, and the high base number counter. The value of is cleared to 0 (step S2504A). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a first jackpot start designation command (step S2505A), and sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first jackpot release preprocessing (step S2506A).

In the second embodiment, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the passage gate. It is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that the game ball passes through 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21.

58-20 and 58-21 are flowcharts showing the first jackpot end process in the first special symbol process process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A), and if the big hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step S2204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S2201A), and control is performed to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step S2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S2203A), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206A). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S63A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets a probability variation flag indicating that it is in the probability variation state, shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207A), and is in the process of shortening the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that is set to shift to the KT state (step S2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223A. In the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set, so that the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step S2209A). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S63A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212A), sets the high base flag, and shifts to the high base state (step S2213A). Further, the special figure time reduction flag is set to shift to the KT state (step S2214A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223A. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, only the high base flag is set, and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step S2504A of the first gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is completed, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base count counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. In step S2010A of the first special symbol stop processing, it is determined as Y, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter in step S2011A is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step S2219A), and sets the special figure time reduction flag to enter the KT state. Transition (step S2220A). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step S2221A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223A. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step S2223A).

FIG. 58-22 is a flowchart showing the first small hit end process in the first special symbol process process. In the first small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step S2300A), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step S2304A. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the first small hit flag is reset (step S2301A), and control is performed to transmit the small hit end designation command (step S2302A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the small hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step S2303A), and the process is performed. finish.

In step S2304A, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2304A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step S2305A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2305A), the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step S2309A).

FIG. 58-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing, it means that the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol. This is the case when neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S51B). Specifically, the count value of the second hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In addition to storing in the second random number buffer area of (step S53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second hold storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step S55B). In this example, by executing the process of step S55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step S56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S69B without performing the processing after step S58B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step S59B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether the random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step S57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps S58B to S63B and is small. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step S58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S61B). .. Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 9R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 2R normal jackpot (step S62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step S63B). ), The process proceeds to step S69B.

If the big hit is not made in step S60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step S64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step S65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S65B). Step S66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the hit type determination random number (step S67B), and stores the small hit type (step S68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit B or small hit C (see FIG. 58-5 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step S69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step S69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step S75B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step S70B). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step S71B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S75B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step S72B), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step S73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step S74B). Then, the process proceeds to step S75B.

Then, in step S75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S75B is determined.

In step S59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 58-16. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 58-16, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step S1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58-7 (C) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 fluctuates according to whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, any one of the variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 58-7 (D) to 58-8 (I) is selected for the second special symbol variation pattern table. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 58-7 (D). Select, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58-7 (E) for the 2nd to 49th variations, and select the second variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58-7 (F) for the 50th variation. Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 58-8 (G). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 58-8 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (in the case of high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58-8 (I) is selected.

The second special symbol variation process is the same as the first special symbol variation process shown in FIGS. 58-17. That is, in the first special symbol variation processing shown in FIGS. 58-17, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol variation processing is explained.

In the second special symbol variation processing, the same processing as in steps S1124A to S1126A of the first special symbol variation processing is executed, and the large hit symbol or the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. If so, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command, and the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled so as to be forcibly missed. With such a configuration, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), the remaining second hold memory can be digested, and the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing in the absence of the player can be generated. It can be suppressed.

In addition, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol (on the right side of the game area). In a gaming machine configured to provide a starting winning opening, which is not a variable winning ball device, and to shift to a normal state via a time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH). , As described above, the configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, as the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed accordingly. By increasing the frequency of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state, and further suppress the occurrence of the jackpot at the unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be done.

FIG. 58-24 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step S2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step S2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2012B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step S2014B). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step S2015B). When the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step S2016B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the process proceeds to step S2018B as it is.

If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot signal output flag (step S2017B). In the second embodiment, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in step S2017B, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and the jackpot signal is signaled. If the external output of 2 is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S2018B), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S2019B), and sets "1" in the round number counter (step). S2020B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2021B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S2022B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second gate passage waiting process (step S2023B).

By executing the processes of steps S2021B and S2022B, in this example, the right-handed lamp 132 is started to light when a big hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game, and the right side. The striking lamp 132 is turned on.

If the second big hit flag is not set (N in step S2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step S2024B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S2025B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step S2026B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2027B), and right-handed with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a lighting start designation command (step S2028B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit opening preprocessing (step S2029B).

By executing the processes of steps S2027B and S2028B, in this example, the right-handed lamp 132 is started to light when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. The right-handed lamp 132 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed lamp 132 should already be lit when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process in step S2026B, if a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right-handed lamp 132 may be started to light in duplicate. The process of sending a right-handed lighting start specification command is not performed.

If the second small hit flag is not set (N in step S2024B), the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step S2030B).

FIG. 58-25 is a flowchart showing a second gate passage waiting process in the second special symbol process process. In the second gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step S2501B). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step S2502B). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the process proceeds to step S2504B as it is.

If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, unless it is in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot signal output flag (step S2503B). In the second embodiment, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the fact that the jackpot signal output flag is set in step S2503B, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 to the hall computer is started, and the jackpot signal is signaled. If the external output of 2 is not in progress, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, if set, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special figure time reduction flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 (step S2504B). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a second jackpot start designation command (step S2505B), and sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second jackpot release preprocessing (step S2506B).

In the second embodiment, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the second gate passage waiting process, but the passage gate. It is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that the game ball passes through 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21.

58-26 and 58-27 are flowcharts showing the second big hit end process in the second special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step S2204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S2201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed in the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S2203B), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2206B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207B), and sets the special figure time reduction flag to shift to the KT state (step S2207B). Step S2208B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223B. In the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set, so that the control is performed in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

If it is neither a 16R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 9R probability variation jackpot (step S2209B). Whether or not it is a 9R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 9R probability change jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2212B), sets the high base flag, and shifts to the high base state (step S2213B). Further, the special figure time reduction flag is set to shift to the KT state (step S2214B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223B. Therefore, in the case of a 9R probability variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of a 9R probability variation jackpot, the high base number counter is not set only by setting the high base flag. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step S2504B of the second gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 9R probability variation jackpot is completed, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base count counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. In the second special symbol stop process, Y is determined in step S2010B, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter in step S2011B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 9R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step S2219B), and sets the special figure time reduction flag to enter the KT state. Transition (step S2220B). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step S2221B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223B. Therefore, in the case of a 2R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step S2223B).

FIG. 58-28 is a flowchart showing the second small hit end process in the second special symbol process process. In the second small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step S2300B), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step S2304B. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the second small hit flag is reset (step S2301B), and control is performed to transmit the small hit end designation command (step S2302B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step S2303B), and the process is performed. finish.

In step S2304B, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2304B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step S2305B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2305B), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step S2306B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2307B), and right-handed with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a lighting end designation command (step S2308B).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step S2309B).

Here, the transition of the gaming state in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the second embodiment. First, in the second embodiment, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 16R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIGS. 58-29, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs in the low probability / low base state, it shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. The high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps S2206A-S2208A). In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and until the next jackpot occurs. A high probability / high base state is maintained (see steps S2209A, S2212A-S2214A). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps S2219A to S2221A).

In the second embodiment, the player moves to the right of the gaming area after transitioning to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state). Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 16R probability variation jackpot, a 9R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot is mainly generated.

As shown in FIGS. 58-29, when a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), a high probability / low base state occurs after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2206B to S2208B). In addition, when a 9R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2209B, S2212B to S2214B). In the second embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 9R probability variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 58-4), so that the probability is once high / In the high base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B).

As shown in FIGS. 58-29, when a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a high probability / low base state occurs after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2206B to S2208B). In addition, when a 9R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2209B, S2212B to S2214B). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B). In the second embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 58-4 (D) and (E)). Once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. If a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and the probability / high base state is reached, and then 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, FIG. 58-29 shows. As shown, it shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps S2010A to S2014A).

As shown in FIGS. 58-29, when a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), a high probability / low base state occurs after the jackpot game ends. It shifts to (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2206B to S2208B). In the second embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is 15% (see FIGS. 58-4 (D) and (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when a 9R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2209B, S2212B to S2214B). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B).

In addition, in FIG. 58-29, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) has been described, but the variation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is also possible that the display will be performed. In this case, when a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 9R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIGS. 58-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, it shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIGS. 58-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, it shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIGS. 58-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, it shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Next, a normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 58-30 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process process. In the normal symbol process processing, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 and the gate switch 21 is turned on (step S5111), Control is performed to transmit the gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passing process (step S5113).

In the second embodiment, when the process of steps S5111 to S5113 is executed and the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the gate passage designation command is transmitted. In the second embodiment, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area, but is in a state of waiting for the passage of the gate after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and before the jackpot game is started. Regardless of whether or not, the gate passage specification command is sent.

Then, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes shown in steps S5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In the second embodiment, when the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected in step S5111, the gate switch passing process in step S5113 is executed regardless of whether or not the gate is waiting to pass. Normally, the variable display of the symbol is executed, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed only when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when it is not in the gate passage waiting state, and the normal symbol is executed even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the gate passing state. It may be configured not to execute the variable display of.

Further, in the second embodiment, the passing gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal starting area and the operating area, but the special symbol process processing (see step S25 in FIG. 5) is performed in the timer interrupt processing. Since it is executed before the normal symbol process process (see step S26 in FIG. 5), the game of the passing gate 41 as the normal starting area is performed after the passing detection process of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the operating area is performed. The passage detection process of the sphere is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch pass processing (step S5113): In the CPU 103, the count value (gate pass memory number) of the gate pass memory counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the pass gate 41) is the maximum value (in this example, " 4 ”) is confirmed. If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1. It should be noted that the LED of the normal figure hold indicator 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step S5100): When the CPU 103 is in a state where the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S5100, specifically, the normal symbol In the case where the display 20 does not display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20 is not being opened or closed), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed. If the number of memory passing through the gate is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step S5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step S5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step S5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step S5103).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step S5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol process timer to the normal electric accessory operating time and timers. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5104).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step S5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100).

FIG. 58-31 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step S5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the number of gate passing memories is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing storage number counter (step S5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step S5121), the process ends as it is. If the gate-passing memory number is not 0 (N in step S5121), the CPU 103 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing memory number = 1 (step S5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage storage counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random values for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each gate passing memory number are always extracted is that the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol, performs a lottery process based on a random number (random number value for determining whether to hit a normal symbol), and determines whether or not to hit a normal symbol. Is determined (step S5127). In the second embodiment, in step S5127, the CPU 103 is uniformly 99/100 regardless of whether or not it is in the probabilistic state, whether or not it is in the KT state, or whether or not it is in the high base state. It is decided to hit the normal symbol with the probability of.

In step S5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is within the hit range (when it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as a display result (step S5128), and proceeds to step S5130. Further, in step S5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range (when it is out of range), the CPU 103 sets the out-of-order symbol as a display result (step S5129), and proceeds to step S5130.

In step S5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y, S5131 in step S5130). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N, S5132 in step S5130).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101) (step S5133).

FIG. 58-32 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step S5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step S3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (hits in step S5127). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step S3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step S5127, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step S3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100) (step S5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step S3708).

In step S3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step S3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step S3704), and if it is set, That is, in the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3706). Further, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3705). ..

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step S5103) (step S3707).

FIG. 58-33 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step S5103). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step S3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3802), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step S3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step S3803). , That is, in the case of the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3805). Further, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S3804).

As described above, in the second embodiment, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By setting, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the start winning prize in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the second embodiment. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened many times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of times the 6B is opened may be set to 1 time, whereas the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B may be opened may be set to 2 times in the first KT state). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning of the second starting winning opening.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B shown above and the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state. It may be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state (step S3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5104) (step S3807).

(Setting suggestion production)
In the second embodiment, in the effect control board 12 (sub side), the set value is specified based on the set value command (effect control command) transmitted from the main board 11 (main side), and the set value is suggested. Determine the presence / absence and type of setting suggestion effect.

FIG. 58-34 is a diagram showing an example of a set value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIGS. 58-34, in the set value suggestion effect determination table, there is no set value suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect A, set value suggestion effect B, set value suggestion effect C, set value suggestion effect D, and set value. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect E and the set value suggestion effect F, respectively.

The set value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 58-34, the set value “1” is used. In some cases, the execution rate is the highest. Further, the set value suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 58-34, the set value “2” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect C is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 58-34, the set value “3” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 58-34, the set value “4” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect E is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 58-34, the set value “5” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect F is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 58-34, the set value “ When it is "6", the execution rate is the highest.

Next, an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 58-35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the setting value suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 58-35 (A), when the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is being executed on the image display device 5, the execution timing of the set value suggestion effect is determined in FIG. 58-35 (B1). )-(B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 58-35 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed according to the mode in which the predetermined character images CH1, CH2, and CH3 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when the set value suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIGS. 58-35 (B1), the image display device 5 is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image CH1 is displayed in the blue display color. The value suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 58-35 (B2), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image CH2 is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5. The suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 58-35 (B3), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image CH3 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. Suggestion production is executed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 58-35, the case where the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect C, and the set value suggestion effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when the set value suggestion effect B is executed. Is displayed with a predetermined character image in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow is displayed when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in a color display color.

In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image having a different display color is displayed and the setting value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. It is possible to have a sense of expectation for.

(Small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production)
In the second embodiment, the effect control board 12 (sub side) is in the second KT state based on the effect control command (for example, high accuracy / second KT background designation command) transmitted from the main board 11 (main side). It is determined whether or not there is, and if it is the second KT state, the presence / absence and type of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect suggesting that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues is determined.

FIG. 58-36 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 58-36, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is not determined, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B are determined. A value has been assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Further, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 58-36, in this example, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest when the set value is "2". The execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "3", and the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "4". Is the next highest, and when the set value is "5", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 58-36, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is when the set value is "6". Execution rate is the highest.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the set value is "1", and the jackpot probability is the highest when the set value is "6". However, when the second KT state is in the state, the jackpot occurs. Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the probability of continuation is high), and the setting value "6" is set. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

As described above, the continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the expectation that the control period to the second KT state will be extended without the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. Therefore, especially when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed. It is possible to further increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 58-37 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative symbol that is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In this example, when the second KT state is in progress, as shown in FIG. 58-37 (A), for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display Im4 such as “small hit RUSH”, and the second KT state is displayed. It is recognizable that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIGS. 58-37 (A), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. Then, as shown in FIGS. 58-37 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 58-37 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying the predetermined effect images Im5 and Im6 on the image display device 5. In this example, the case where the image of the racing car is displayed as the predetermined effect images Im5 and Im6 is shown. In this case, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 58-37 (B1), the image display device 5 displays a predetermined effect image Im5 in a blue display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. 58-37 (B2), the image display device 5 displays a predetermined effect image Im5 in a red display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, or the effect image of any display color is displayed to suggest the small hit RUSH continuation. Depending on whether the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

(Right-handed notification)
Next, the right-handed notification in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58-38, for example, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The right-handed notification LED 37 is provided by the effect control board 12 (sub side) based on the effect control commands (right-handed lighting end start command, right-handed lighting end designation command) transmitted from the main board 11 (main side). Lighting is controlled.

In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is performed, the jackpot game is in progress. As shown in FIG. 58-38 (1), the right-handed lamp 132 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) (see steps S2021A and S2021B). Further, as shown in FIG. 58-38 (1), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command (steps S2022A, S2022B, S634). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 58-38 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display Im7 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step S624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIGS. 58-38 (2)) during the small hit game. The right-handed lamp 132 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step S2027B). Further, as shown in FIG. 58-38 (2), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command (see steps S2028B and S634). .. However, unlike during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 58-38 (2), the right-handed display Im7 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed lamp 132 is turned on and the right-handed hit is made during the small hit game, as shown in FIGS. 58-38 (3). The notification LED 37 is not lit, and the right-handed display Im7 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed.

(Effects of the second embodiment, etc.)
As described above, according to the second embodiment, the first identification information (for example, the first identification information (for example, the game ball) is based on the entry of the game medium (for example, the game ball) into the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening). For example, it is possible to execute variable display of the first special symbol), and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is based on the fact that the game medium has entered the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). ) Variable display is possible. Further, a variable means (for example, a special variable prize) that can be changed into a first state in which the game medium can enter (for example, an open state) and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or cannot enter (for example, a closed state). A ball device 17) is provided. Further, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) and a special state having a lower advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) For example, it can be controlled to either the small hit game state), and the variable means is controlled to the first state when it is controlled to the special state. Further, the first starting area is provided so that the game medium moving on a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the game area) can enter the moving path in which the game medium can move, and the variable means is out of the moving path. A game medium that moves on a specific route (for example, the area to the right of the game area) is provided so as to be accessible. Further, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, a right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 58-38 (1) and (2)) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific route, and the first identification information is variably displayed. When the special state is controlled after the execution of, the specific notification is not executed (see, for example, FIG. 58-38 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in the second embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the first special symbol side can be executed. Is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than the small hit type on the 2nd special symbol side, and when a small hit is made in the variable display of the 1st special symbol, the second If the variable display of the special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped, if the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol with a low winning rate (advantage), it is practically Although it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special winning opening, the player wastes the game ball, which is not preferable because a disadvantageous launch promotion notification is given. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, while the right-handed notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the reserved storage and the variable second identification information. It includes a second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to display as hold storage. Further, when the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the display result of the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is set. It is controllable, and a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information (for example, a small hit symbol). It is possible to control the small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency at which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel. As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the second embodiment, a predetermined value can be given when the special state is controlled (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening). , It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the big prize opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, the right-handed lamp 132 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 58-38 (1) and (2) are lit) and the first specific notification are more visible than the first specific notification. It is possible to execute the second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed display Im7 shown in FIG. 58-38 (1)). Further, when controlled to an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 58-38 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the special state is controlled. At that time, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 58-38 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state, a higher ratio is more advantageous than when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state. Control to a special state of a low degree (for example, small hit A). Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 58-38 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative symbol) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect of a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained. , Forcibly stop and display the non-reach off symbol). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognition of being controlled to a special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved memory stored by the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the second embodiment, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, a regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific route. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second identification information from being targeted at the timing when the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed at the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the capture measures against the game machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a passage member for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right is provided as a delay means on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area. You may.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the effect is produced based on the information from the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) for controlling the progress of the game and the game control means. (For example, the effect control CPU 120) is provided. Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed lamp 132) that performs a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes a specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, right-handed notification is executed during the jackpot game regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Cases are shown, but not limited to such aspects. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right large winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the game area. If a big hit is made on the variable display of the symbol, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if a big hit is made on the variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to a game machine configured as described above, if a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is used. If a big hit occurs, the right-handed notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification may be executed during the jackpot game. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right-handed winning opening) is controlled to an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification is executed during the big-hit game to prevent the player from accidentally performing the right-handed operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, a case where right-handed notification is executed even in the KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is applied to a game machine provided on the left side of the game area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. May be good.

Further, in this example, in addition to lighting the right-handed lamp 132 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game, the right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display Im7 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Cases have been shown, but not limited to such aspects. For example, even in the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH), when the first variation display after the end of the big hit game is executed, in addition to the lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 and the right-handed notification LED 37 The right-handed notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed display Im7 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, the right-handed display Im7 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It may be configured to execute right-handed notification.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large size right-handed display Im7 as shown in FIG. 58-38 (1), the image display device 5 displays a symbol display (for example, a right-pointing triangular display) indicating right-handedness. May be configured to enable right-handed notification.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is configured to be different depending on the small hit type, and the variable display of the first special symbol indicates a small hit. The selection ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the case is a small hit or a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a small number of prize balls. , When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a high winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a large number of prize balls can be easily selected. It may be configured as.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 58-38 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 58-38 (3)), but when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. May be configured so that right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed in a normal state, when a small hit occurs due to a variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the second embodiment, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is possible. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display display result, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and when controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 58-2 and 58). -3). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball ejection performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in the second embodiment, by making the number of special determination values common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is common), the difference in the degree of advantage becomes excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents and prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). It can be executed in parallel with the display). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the special states include a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. Is controllable. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in the game machine that can be controlled to the second special state.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 58-37) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, by suggesting the advantage of the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the second embodiment, as the variable display display result, a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) different from the specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is produced. When the variable display to be derived and displayed is executed, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value (for example, the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 58-35) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of the way is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or the set value suggestion effect during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various aspects can be considered.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined by using the special type determination value (for example, the small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. Further, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-5). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the second embodiment, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the small hit type is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming too large and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 58-5, the case where the small hit type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the small hit type determination ratio may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot, 9R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot). In addition, the type of advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-4). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the second embodiment, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the jackpot type is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 58-4, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the jackpot type determination ratio may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the variable display mode is determined by using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variable pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-9). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the second embodiment, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the variation pattern is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming too large and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous in factors other than the big hit lottery. It is not preferable because the degree (difference in ball ejection performance) is greatly different, but in the second embodiment, by making the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern common regardless of the set value, such a problem does not occur. I have to.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 58-9, the case where the fluctuation pattern allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the fluctuation efficiency is set to be different depending on the set value by making the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" and providing a difference in the fluctuation time. It may be configured so that the advantage varies depending on the value.

Further, according to the second embodiment, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is possible. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display display result, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. It is decided that the special judgment value (for example, the judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display the variable display and the predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. A predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of loss) is included. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set values (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-specific state) and a specific state (for example, a probable state) that is more likely to be controlled to be more advantageous than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination value corresponding to the specific state of all the set values (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value in the specific state.

Further, according to the second embodiment, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel with the variable display of). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the second identification information in the specific state can be displayed in a variable manner. Corresponding determination values include predetermined determination values (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency of the special display result is increased. Further, when a variable display that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) is derived and displayed is executed, a set value suggestion effect (for example, the setting shown in FIGS. 58-35) that suggests a set value is executed. Value suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display display result, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, among the judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-3), and the judgment corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game playability.

(Example A of pachinko gaming machine production)
Next, as an effect embodiment A executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a setting function capable of setting the setting value described in the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, the first to fourth embodiments will be described. explain. In the production embodiment A (Examples 1 to 4), the setting suggestion suggesting the set value is given priority and executed.

(Example 1)
First, the effect control process process executed in order to realize the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment of the effect embodiment A will be described.

FIG. 59-1 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (step S271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (step S271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer (not shown). The various command data and various flags stored in association with "4" are shifted upward by one buffer number (step S272). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in step S271 (step S271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (step S273). If the second variation start command reception flag is not set (step S273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variation start command reception flag is set (step S273; Y). , Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer (not shown) are buffered. It shifts up one by one (step S274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step S272 or step S274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step S275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step S276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the first embodiment, when the received variable display result specification command is the second variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, an even number of three symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) that are aligned with the symbols. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the 4th variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) in which 3 symbols are aligned with "7" is used as the stop symbol. decide. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probabilistic big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334" or "778", which is the same chance as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 59-2 to determine whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the variable display (step S277).

(Variable display)
As the effect during the variable display, the effect suggests the advantageous state suggestion result that suggests that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the setting suggestion result that suggests the setting value that the CPU 103 performs in the set value change process. It is a production (predetermined production) that can be any of the above. In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach notice (notice effect) suggesting that the variable display mode may become a reach and become a big hit as an effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result. .. Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the set values 1 to 6 the set value is. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display in-process effect in which the effect result can be both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result, that is, both a reach notice and a setting suggestion can be executed. When it is possible, the reach notice in which the effect result is the advantageous state suggestion result can be executed in preference to the setting suggestion in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 59-3, the variable display effect has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9, and the effect control CPU 120 is a variable display effect. When the execution is decided, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the variable display effect, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used. It is decided by lottery whether to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 59-5 (A) to 59-5, the variable display effect starts at the timing when a predetermined period elapses after the variable display of the symbol is started (the timing before the variable display mode reaches the reach). Then, a plurality of (for example, eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger rides fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area. By fading out to the right side of the display area, the variable display effect ends. Further, an image Z2 showing that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped while the plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side may be displayed, and a set value is set depending on the number of the dropped paragliders. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body is destroyed and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies are destroyed and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and fall.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 59-5 (B) and 59-6 (A), in the patterns PT-1 to PT-8, the timing at which the paraglider is destroyed is the same, and each pattern PT-1 to PT-1 to 1 to 8 is destroyed. The number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 is destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number may be used). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 59-6 (B), the pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like the pattern PT-8, but the mode in which the paragliders are destroyed is the pattern PT-. It is different from 8. Specifically, seven paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining one is destroyed at the second timing after the first timing when the other seven are destroyed. ..

Which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the effect period of such a variable display effect, that is, the reach notice or the effect result in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result is the setting suggestion result. Regardless of which of the setting suggestions, the effect of the common mode (for example, the effect of the aspect in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area). Is executed, and a non-common mode of effect (for example, a number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is an image display device) that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result. It is composed of a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward in the display area of 5) is executed.

In the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as the effect during the variable display, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but the decorative symbols are displayed in a smaller size than usual. The small symbol may be variably displayed at a predetermined place. Further, during the execution period of the variable display effect, another notice effect or the like different from the variable display effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59-3, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. Regarding the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are defined as a specific pattern (specific mode) corresponding to the setting suggestion suggesting which of the 6 to 6 is set, and the number of paragliders destroyed is eight. It is said to be a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to the reach notice that suggests the possibility of reaching. In other words, the effect during variable display has the same effect mode in the common effect period, but the suggested target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode (number of paragliders destroyed) in the non-common effect period, and 1 to 7 paragliders If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest that the set values may be odd (for example, 1, 3, 5), and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 have even set values. (For example, 2, 4, 6), the pattern PT-5 suggests that the set value may be equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5), and the pattern PT-5. 6 suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6). ..

The patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), and therefore, any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting). It is regarded as the first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with a low expectation that it is, and for patterns PT-5 to PT-6, the set value is any of 5 and 6. In some cases, it is determined at a high rate, so that it is a second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high), second specific mode} with a high degree of expectation that the set values are 5 and 6.

In the first embodiment, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low settings and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high settings, but the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low settings and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high settings. , The setting values 1 and 2 may be set to a low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 may be set to an intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 may be set to a high setting to set the execution ratio of the effect pattern.

On the other hand, the pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and the pattern PT-9 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding the pattern PT-8, the variable display mode of the symbol is determined at a high rate when it becomes the normal reach, so that the expectation of becoming the super reach is low. The first special pattern {reach notice (low), the first Regarding the pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach, which is highly expected to become super reach, is determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the symbol becomes super reach. Notice (high), second special aspect}.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests that the jackpot game state is controlled, and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-) that suggests the setting. It is possible to execute a variable display effect based on any one of a plurality of types of effect modes including 1 to PT-7), and a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (predetermined effect of a special mode). When any of the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of a specific aspect) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, the reach notice can be executed in preference to the setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 are determined when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Since the fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is out of alignment than when it is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 becomes a super reach, that is, the jackpot expectation is a pattern. While the pattern is lower than PT-9, the pattern PT-9 is determined because the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is out of order. , Super reach, that is, a pattern with a higher expectation of jackpot than pattern PT-8.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the variable display effect, a mode suggesting the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set depending on the number of paragliders destroyed has been illustrated, but the present invention illustrates this. It is not limited, and the appearance of a predetermined number (for example, 8) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders may suggest a big hit or a high setting. Furthermore, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and which setting value is set, the effect mode can be changed in various ways, for example, the number of characters appearing, the type of character appearing, and the like. It may be something that can suggest a big hit or a set value.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the number corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or emitting a game effect lamp 9 or the like when falling, it may be possible to notify that the pattern has a high expectation of a big hit or a high setting.

As shown in FIG. 59-2, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step S291). The variable display result is a variable display result specification command for specifying the variable display result (off, non-probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area.

Then, the random numbers for determining the reach notice type are extracted, and the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 59-4 (A) is used to determine whether or not the reach notice is executed in the variable display effect. A lottery is performed to determine the type of reach notice in the case of the above (step S292).

In the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 59-4 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 20 is assigned to pattern PT-8. A number of determination values are assigned, and 60 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-9. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than super reach.

When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. There is. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than normal reach.

When the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to the patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, it is easier to win the pattern PT-8 at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than the normal reach fluctuation pattern, and when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, Pattern PT-9 is easier to win at a higher rate than in cases other than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, when an effect based on pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach variation pattern than a super reach variation pattern, and when an effect based on pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than a normal reach variation pattern. It is likely to be a reach variation pattern. In other words, pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is considered as a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Since there is a high possibility that it will be, it is considered to be a reach notice (high) pattern with a high expectation of big hits.

Returning to FIG. 59-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is won as a result of whether or not the reach notice is executed and the type of lottery is performed in step S292. Determine (step S293). When it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in preference to the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (step S294). , Step S304.

If it is determined in step S292 that the pattern PT-9 has not been won, that is, if the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 is won, the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low). )} Is won, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read out, and the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S295). Next, the random numbers for determining the setting suggestion type are extracted, and the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the set value specified in step S295 is used to determine whether or not the setting suggestion is executed in the variable display effect. , A lottery is performed to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (step S296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 59-4 (B), when the set value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1. Judgment values are assigned, pattern PT-2 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-3 is assigned 25 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 judgment values, and patterns. Four judgment values are assigned to PT-5, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-6, and one judgment value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 25 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 1 judgment value, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 4 judgment values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 20 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 5 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 judgment values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 25 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 judgment values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 10 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 25 judgment values. Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number 1 or 3, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. When the set value is 2 or 4, it is easy to win, and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are easily won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and the set value is 5. Is easier to win the pattern PT-5 at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, the pattern PT-6 is won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's easier to do. Further, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, it is confirmed that the set value is 6 when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if an effect based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider is destroyed. If the effect based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with 5 or more bodies is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is any of 5 and 6. That is, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are considered to be setting suggestions (low) that are unlikely to be set high (set value 5 or 6), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are set to high (set value 5 or 6). It is said that the setting suggestion (high) is likely to be 6).

In the first embodiment, the reach advance notice type determination random number and the setting suggestion type determination random number are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of judgment values of each determination random number is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number and the like should be appropriately determined. Just do it. Further, each determination random number counter for generating each of these determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in the random number update process.

Returning to FIG. 59-2, the effect control CPU 120 performed one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} as a result of whether or not the setting suggestion was executed and the lottery of the type was performed in step S296. Determines whether or not was won (step S297). If it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been won, and if the non-execution of the reach notice has been won in step S293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been won. When the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on the above is uniquely determined and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in step S293, the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are selected. The execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of the above is determined with priority over the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (step S298), and the process proceeds to step S304.

When any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won in step S297, that is, when the setting suggestion was not executed or any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won. Is whether or not the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in step S293 based on the non-execution of the setting suggestion or the winning of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in step S297. (Step S300).

If it is determined in step S300 that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has been won, and if the non-execution of the setting suggestion is won in step S297, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is won. If any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won in step S297, the reach notice based on the winning pattern PT-8 ( The execution of (low) is determined in preference to the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (step S301), and the process proceeds to step S304.

If it is determined in step S300 that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has not been won, whether or not any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} has been won. (Step S302), and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, the execution of the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined, and in step S304. move on. Further, when none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, that is, when the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is in progress without deciding the execution of the effect. The production determination process ends.

In step S304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any of step S294, step S298, step S301, and step S303 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S304). The variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect is determined is set (step S305), and the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 59-1, after the variable display effect determination process in step S277, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has set the variable display effect execution decision flag in step S278, that is, the variable display in step S277. It is determined whether or not the execution of the variable display during effect of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined in the medium effect determination process.

If the variable display effect execution decision flag is set, the process proceeds to step S279, and the period until the variable display effect start is set in the variable display effect start waiting timer (step S279), and the variable display is in progress. The effect execution decision flag is cleared (step S280), and the process proceeds to step S281. On the other hand, if the effect execution decision flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to step S281 without going through steps S279 and S280.

As the period until the start of the variable display effect, in the first embodiment, the timing at which the paraglider appears is the start timing of the variable display effect, and the process table of the variable display effect executed from the start of the variable display effect. Since the variable display effect is started based on the above, an example is shown in which the period until the start timing of the variable display effect is set in the variable display effect start waiting timer. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect (not shown) showing a precursor is performed before the timing at which the variable display effect is started, and the timing at which the precursor is started is the variable display effect. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the variable display effect is started may be set in the variable display effect start wait timer.

In step S281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S282).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step S283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step S284). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step S285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step S286).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the symbol based on the reach variation pattern, the predetermined variable display mode is determined after the variable display is started and before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. At the effect timing, either reach notice or setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect, and when deciding whether or not to execute the variable display effect, the effect result becomes the advantageous state suggestion result. It is possible to execute (the effect of the special aspect) with priority over the setting suggestion (the effect of the specific aspect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display of FIG. 59-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reach notice is executed and the type lottery, and whether or not the setting suggestion is executed and the type lottery. Give priority to.

That is, in the reach notice lottery, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% when the fluctuation pattern is super reach (step S294). Reach notice (high) will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 60%. Even if the lottery for setting suggestion is executed in step S296 based on the winning of the reach notice (low), the setting suggestion based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is performed in step S297. If (High) is not won, the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 will be decided in step S301, so the reach notice is executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. Will be done.

Further, the reach notice includes a reach notice (low) and a reach notice (high) suggesting that the ratio of being controlled by a big hit is higher than the reach notice (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT. When both the reach notice (high) based on −9 and the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are feasible, the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is set to pattern PT-. Priority is given to the setting suggestion based on any of 1 to PT-7 (step S294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are feasible, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. The setting suggestion (high) based on the setting can be executed in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (step S298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the reach notice from being excessively prioritized and the execution of the setting suggestion to be restricted, so that the interest of the effect during the variable display is lowered.

Further, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) suggesting that the setting is more likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT. When both the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are feasible, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is used. The setting suggestion (high) based on the setting is executed in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (step S298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are feasible, the pattern PT-8 is set. Based on reach notice (low) can be executed in preference to setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (step S301). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being excessively prioritized and the execution of the reach notice being restricted, so that the interest of the effect during the variable display is lowered.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For details, the reach notice (high) is executed with priority over the setting suggestion (high), the setting suggestion (high) is executed with priority over the reach notice (low), and the reach notice (low) is set and suggested (low). Priority is given to execution over low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low)".

In the first embodiment, the execution ratio of the reach notice may be set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the variable display effect is an effect executed during the variable display period of the symbol, and the reach notice suggests that the variable display result may be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least. It suggests which setting value is not changed during the business period. Further, it is not preferable for the amusement park that the setting suggestion frequently occurs and the player can easily guess which of the set values is. Therefore, when the effect during variable display is executed in the super reach fluctuation pattern and when the set value is set high, it is preferable for the player to suggest any of them, but the set value is suggested at another timing. On the other hand, since the jackpot suggestion can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the reach notice appears at a higher rate than the setting suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display effect is an effect that is executed only during the variable display period of the super reach variation pattern or the symbol based on the normal reach variation pattern, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the non-reach variation pattern, the variable display mode is reach. In this case, the player's expectation for the big hit is higher than in the case of not reaching. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, especially in the case of the jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, the player's expectation for the jackpot will decrease and the production will be inappropriate. By giving priority to the setting suggestion to be executed, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming inappropriate.

Further, in the first embodiment, as a tendency of the effect during variable display, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, for example, it is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern and is high. In some situations, such as when the setting is made, the execution ratio may be set so that the setting suggestion is executed in preference to the reach notice.

Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is executed prior to the lottery for the setting suggestion (priority). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution rate of the reach notice is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion, the lottery for the setting suggestion may be performed before the lottery for the reach notice. , The order is arbitrary. Further, if the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach notice is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, it is shown in FIGS. 59-4 (A) and 59-4 (B). It is not limited to what is described.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a mode in which a setting suggestion suggesting a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and as a setting suggestion, it may be suggested whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has changed since the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started last time.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) can be executed is, for example, a suggestion about the display result of one variable display. As long as it is possible to suggest a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, various timings may be used. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory can be executed. If it is suggested about the display result of, the reach notice can be executed at any timing in the period over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the hold storage is executed and the execution period of the variable display. .. Further, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

Further, when both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) can be executed, the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion. Priority is given to the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed before the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Includes determining, and performing reach notices based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Note that executing the reach notice at a rate higher than the setting suggestion includes a case where the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the possibility of a big hit or a set value is suggested by the number of destroyed paragliders, that is, the variable display in-process effect executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed. As an example, a form in which the effect result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are feasible. As the effect during variable display, both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result may be included as the effect result.

That is, in the first embodiment, the variable display effect has a common effect period for the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the effect mode is different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (in the common effect period). It may be a separate production (which does not have a corresponding period) (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach notice and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification 1 of Example 1)
Next, the modified example 1 in the first embodiment of the effect embodiment A will be described with reference to FIG. 59-7. In FIGS. 59-7, (A) is a flowchart showing the effect determination process during variable display as the first modification, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion by prioritizing the execution of the reach notice and the lottery of the type over the lottery of the execution of the setting suggestion and the type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for reach notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-7 (A), in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step S311). Next, the random numbers for determining the effect type are extracted, and the effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) is used to determine whether or not the variable display effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) is executed. A lottery is performed to determine the type of reach notice or setting suggestion when the execution is performed (step S312).

The effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) is not shown in particular, but the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is set according to the type of the variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, although the determination ratios of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 differ depending on the type of the fluctuation pattern and the set values 1 to 6, the execution ratios of the reach notice and the setting suggestion shown in FIG. 59-7 (B) are different. As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (priority) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, that is, the decision rate is set to be higher in the order of reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. (For example, reach notice is determined by 50%, setting suggestion is determined by 40%, and non-execution is determined by 10%).

Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the reach notice (high) is higher than the reach notice (low) (for example, the reach notice (high) is 40% and the reach notice (low) is 10%). It is preferable to determine with. When the set values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) is higher than that of setting suggestion (low) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35% and setting suggestion (low) is 5). %) Is preferable. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has an effect based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low). You just have to decide what to do.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, the embodiment in which the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern, the set value, and the variable display result. Specifically, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach fluctuation pattern, when a big hit occurs, the reach notice should be executed at a higher rate than when it is missed, prioritizing the setting suggestion. Is preferable.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect. Although the possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result are feasible as the effect result, the effect result of the variable display effect is displayed. It may be possible to execute a specific effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

As a specific effect, for example, when a specific image suggesting both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, as shown in FIG. 59-5, a paraglider image Z1 is displayed, a character is displayed. Display an image in which the paraglider in which appears is moving, etc.), or display an image in which the display mode of the paraglider (for example, color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode. It may be displayed, the background color may be different, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special effect sound may be output according to the image display of the paraglider, or the illuminant may be made to emit light in a special light emitting mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result is obtained as the effect result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display effect, while the reach notice and the setting suggestion are variable. It may be possible to execute each independently at an effect timing different from the effect being displayed.

Specifically, for example, a reach notice different from the reach notice shown in FIG. 59-5 (for example, a character notice in which a character appears) can be executed at a different production timing from the variable display effect. On the other hand, the setting suggestion in a mode different from the setting suggestion shown in FIG. 59-5 (for example, the ending image of the jackpot) is displayed at a timing different from the effect during variable display (for example, after the jackpot ends). It may be feasible.

(Example 2)
In Example 1 of Production Example A, a mode in which the variable display effect can be executed only once during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one variable display is in progress. The effect during variable display may be executed multiple times.

For example, as shown in FIG. 59-8 (A) as the second embodiment, the first period from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. And in the second period after the first period, the variable display effect can be executed.

In addition, since the variable display time is short to execute the variable display effect twice or more for the non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns, in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed as the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. However, it is also possible to include a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern as an execution target of the effect during variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, the presence or absence of the variable display effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 59-8 (B) is used according to the variation pattern. Determined at different rates. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-8 (B), when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 40 out of 100 random numbers for determining the effect during variable display are displayed in the variable display effect execution decision table. Is assigned to the execution of the variable display effect, and 60 are assigned to the non-execution of the variable display effect. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 60 out of 100 random numbers for determining the execution of the variable display effect are assigned to the execution of the variable display effect in the variable display effect execution decision table. Individuals are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display.

When the execution of the variable display effect is determined in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 59-8 (A).

If it is decided to execute the variable display effect when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, it is executed in the first period as shown in FIGS. 59-9 (A) and 59-9 (B). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice at different ratios between the variable display effect to be performed and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. In the same period, the execution ratios of the setting suggestion and the reach notice are set to be the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-10, when the execution of the variable display effect is determined when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the effect type (effect) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period. The pattern) is determined to be either pattern PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , 40% to determine pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expected (low) or expected (high)). Further, as shown in FIGS. 59-11, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is patterned at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Determined to be either PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)), and at a rate of 60%, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation). (High)) is decided.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 and 59-11, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT- at a rate of 1%. Any of 5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 35%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.5%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%. At a rate of 2.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, it was decided as pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Any one of {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 35%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and is 3%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 3.5%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 55%, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. Any one of {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided at a rate of 5% {setting suggestion (high)}, and pattern PT-8 was decided at a rate of 35%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and is 6%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 59-12 and 59-13, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, it is executed in the first period. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 is decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 15%, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice is decided at a rate of 25%. (High)} is decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 15% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, it was decided on pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.5%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%. At a rate of 2.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, it was decided as a pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 15%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and is 3%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 56.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 3.5%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 15%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and is 6%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the execution of the variable display effect is decided, the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach is used as the effect type of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. The rate (60%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach as the effect type of the variable display during the first period. It is set higher than the rate (40%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is decided.

Therefore, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach notice that becomes the advantageous state suggestion result becomes easier to be executed, so that one game result, that is, a timing close to the timing at which the variable display result of the variable display is derived. Expectations for big hits can be increased.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, with respect to the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the first period, any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low)). Or, while the rate at which the setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set higher than the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined. As for the effect type of the variable display effect that is executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern. Any of PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the determined ratio.

That is, the patterns PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 corresponding to the reach notice are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are the second. By determining the period at a lower rate than the first period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period, and the reach notice is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the second period. ..

Therefore, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as the variable display effect in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as the variable display effect in the second period, that is, the variable display is in progress. The variable display is caused by the fact that the reach notice is executed so that the expectation of the reach notice decreases as the effect is repeatedly executed (so-called downfall), or the reach notice (high) is executed in the first time. By allowing the player to predict that is likely to be super reach before the reach notice is executed twice, the player's expectation that the variable display is super reach is reduced. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, the variable display effect performed in the second period is more effective than the variable display effect executed in the first period. However, the rate at which any of patterns PT-5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. That is, as the variable display effect is executed, the variable display effect becomes easier to be executed in the pattern PT-9, so that the game against the variable display effect being executed in the patterns PT-5 to PT-8. The expectation of the person can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect is executed twice in the first period and the second period, but the present invention illustrates this. When it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect may be executed three or more times. When the variable display effect is executed three or more times in this way, the effect type determination ratio is set so that the pattern PT-9 can be easily determined each time the variable display effect is executed. It may be possible to maintain the expectation of the engineer for a longer period of time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have a pattern PT- as an effect type. Since the ratio of 1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is different, it is executed in the variable display in-stage effect executed in the first period and in the second period. It is difficult to continuously execute the setting suggestion with the effect during variable display. That is, it is possible to prevent the game entertainment from being lowered due to the variable display being effect becoming monotonous due to the setting suggestion being executed in both of these two variable display during effects.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have a pattern PT- as an effect type. Since the ratio of 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is different, it is executed in the variable display during the first period and in the second period. It is difficult for the reach notice to be executed continuously with the effect during variable display. That is, in both of these two variable display productions, it is possible to prevent the game entertainment from being lowered due to the variable display production becoming monotonous due to the execution of the reach notice.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is used in the first period, although the mode in which the reach notice is executed is different from the case of executing the variable display. The rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect may be the same between the case where the variable display effect is executed and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. By doing so, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the second period, the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect, and the first period and the second period are used. You can expect the player in the same way.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, if the variable display advance notice effect is executed during the same period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined is the same as the variable display notice effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display notice effect executed in the same period. , The rate at which the execution of the reach notice is determined as the effect during variable display may differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing so, the rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect in the first period or the second period changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variable display It is possible to prevent the medium production from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59-9 to 59-13, focusing on the effect during the variable display executed in the first period, the ratio (pattern PT-1 to 1) that determines the execution of the setting suggestion. The ratio for determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the ratio for determining the reach notice (pattern). The rate of determining the execution of PT-8 or the pattern PT9) is set to 40%, which is the same rate regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine. Similarly, focusing on the variable display effect to be executed in the second period, the ratio for determining the execution of the setting suggestion (the ratio for determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7) is the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regardless of the set value, it is set to 40%, which is the same ratio, and the ratio for determining the reach notice (the ratio for determining the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set for the pachinko gaming machine. It is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value.

Therefore, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed in the first period is always performed. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display during the second period (the second variable display during the effect) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the suggestion is executed and the reach notice is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be expected to execute the setting suggestion in the same way.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, the chances of providing reach notice and setting suggestion in one variable display increase, so that the interest is improved. ..

More specifically, when only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of one variable display, the setting suggestion is performed at a timing other than the variable display (for example, the ending or variable display of the jackpot game state). It is possible to execute it independently (when not executing), but when the player is playing a game, the most noticeable thing is during the execution period of the variable display. Therefore, in the variable display in-process effect in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, not only the setting suggestion can be executed during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays most attention to, but also the setting suggestion can be executed in the second embodiment. As described above, by making it possible to execute the variable display effect multiple times in one variable display, not only can the chance of executing the setting suggestion be increased, but also the second period in the first period as described above. If it is executed at a higher rate, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of the reach notice even in the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot.

Further, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during the variable display, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and in at least one of the first period and the second period, it may be decided not to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion.

When it is possible to determine non-execution in this way, even if the execution rate of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, if the execution rate of the reach notice is different between the first period and the second period. Can be made. Further, even if the execution rate of the reach notice is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion can be made different between the first period and the second period.

(Example 3)
In the second embodiment of the effect embodiment A, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 if the variable display effect is the same number of times. Regardless of this, an example is shown in which the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at the same ratio. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 59-14 (A) and 59-14 (B) as Example 3, the effect during variable display is 2 during one variable display. When it is possible to execute the pachinko machine 1 times, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, even if the same number of variable display effects are performed. You may.

When it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect and the second period are executed in the first period as shown in FIGS. 59-14 (A) and 59-14 (B). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice at the same ratio for each of the variable display during production executed in.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 59-15 and 59-16, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. Determined to be -8 {setting suggestion (high)}, determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 30%, and to pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. decide. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and a rate of 2%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 30%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to 1 pattern. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 35%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 35%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 40%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 40%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 45%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a ratio of 47%, and a ratio of 3%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 45%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 50%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 41.5%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 50%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 55%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and a rate of 6%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 55%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 59-17 and 59-18, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 17.5%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 17.5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and 2 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 30% The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to 1 pattern. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and determined at a rate of 20%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 20%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. 2. Determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.2%, and determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 35 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, 22.5% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided by the ratio, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at the ratio of 22.5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 40 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to one of pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 25%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%, and 3 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 45%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, 27.5% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided by the ratio, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at the ratio of 27.5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , 4.5% of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% of pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 50 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 at a rate of 5%, determined to be one of pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 30%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 30%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55% The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the first period is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being any of 1 to 6. Patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined as the production type of the effect during variable display, and the variable display is executed in the second period. The ratio at which the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the medium effect. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

Furthermore, the rate at which pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined as the effect type of the variable display effect executed in the first period and in the second period The rate at which the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the effect during variable display to be executed. Therefore, regardless of whether the reach notice is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same way.

On the other hand, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first set value (for example, the set value 1) and the second. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type differs between the set value (for example, set value 6). , Since the appearance status of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period, a pattern is set as an effect type each time the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. The rate at which PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined decreases, and pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice ( High)} is determined more often. Therefore, when a high setting value (for example, 5, 6) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting is suggested as compared with a case where a low setting value (for example, 1 to 4) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is difficult to execute, so that it is difficult for the player who recognizes the effect during variable display to specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment, the variable display effect executed in the second period is the pattern PT-9 as the effect type than the variable display effect executed in the first period. The rate at which {setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set high. That is, as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 becomes easier to be executed, so that the player's expectation that the variable display effect is executed in the pattern PT-9 is maintained. Can be made to.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59-14, regardless of whether the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variable display executed in the first period is in progress. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined is the same between the effect and the variable display effect executed in the second period. Although the embodiment in which the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined at the same ratio is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. , Even if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is obtained between the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. ~ PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} may be determined at different rates, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice The rate at which (high)} is determined may be different.

In the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period, which are the same as the variable display effect. Although the embodiment of executing the setting suggestion by the ratio is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the first period and the second period. The setting suggestion may be executed at different ratios as these variable display effects depending on the case of executing the variable display effect. By doing so, the rate (appearance rate) at which the setting suggestion is executed changes depending on whether the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59-14, the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the first period and the variable display executed in the second period. When executing the reach notice as the middle effect (the second variable display during the effect), an example of a form in which the reach notice is executed at a different ratio according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the same number of times However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. When executing the reach notice as (the second variable display effect), if the same number of variable display effects are performed, the reach notice is given at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may do it. By doing so, if the effect is during variable display the same number of times, the rate at which the reach notice is executed (appearance status) does not change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , The player can still expect that the reach notice is executed by the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period.

(Example 4)
In the second and third embodiments of the effect embodiment A, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the first period and the second period In each case, a mode for determining whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern is applied to the first period. Regardless of the setting value, it is decided whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion, while for the second period, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value. That is, it may be decided whether to execute the effect to be executed in the first period or the second period according to different judgment criteria.

For example, as shown in FIG. 59-19 as Example 4, the first period and the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach are targeted for the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. It is possible to execute the variable display effect in the second period after the first period. Since the variable display time is short to execute the variable display effect twice or more for the non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns, in the fourth embodiment, the variable display effect is executed as the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. Limited to.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the variable display effect determination process described above, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of the variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period. In the second period, a process of determining the type of effect during variable display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern. In the following, the variable display effect determination process in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59-20.

As shown in FIG. 59-20, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variation pattern (step S311). As described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. Next, it is determined whether the specified fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach (step S312), and if it is normal reach or super reach, the process proceeds to 313, and if it is other than normal reach or super reach, that is, a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern. In the case of, since it is not the target of the variable display effect, the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach in step S312, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read out to specify the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S313). Next, based on the set value specified in step S313, whether or not the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) when the variable display effect is executed are determined by a variable display effect execution determination table (not shown). (Common to normal reach and super reach) is used for determination (step S314).

As shown in FIG. 59-21 (A), in step S314, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect execution determination table during variable display in which the fluctuation pattern is common to normal reach or super reach, and reaches notice, setting suggestion, and non-reach. Decide on one of the executions. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and the non-execution at a rate of 10%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, the execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice is determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is set. It is set so that the larger the value is, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion and the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-22, paying attention to the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the first period, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period. The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 20%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 39%. Then, the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 18%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 1.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 15%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 1.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined not to be executed at a rate of 12.5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 45.5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 10%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 3.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a ratio of 5%, and a ratio of 40%. Determine the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}.

Returning to FIG. 59-20, it is determined in step S314 whether or not the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined (step S315), and if the execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1). ~ PT-9) is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S316), and the variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined is set (step S316). Step S317) and step S318. If the execution is not decided in step S315, that is, if the non-execution is decided, the process proceeds to step S318.

Next, in step S318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (step S318), and if it is determined to be normal reach, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the specified fluctuation pattern and the set value. Whether or not the variable display effect is executed in the second period and the effect type (effect pattern) to be executed are determined by using a variable display effect execution determination table (for normal reach) (step S319).

As shown in FIG. 59-21 (B), in step S319, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution by using the variable display effect execution decision table for normal reach. .. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution at a rate of 5%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, the execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( For high), the execution rate is set to increase as the set value increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-23, paying attention to the case of normal reach regarding the variable display advance notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. Determines the non-execution of the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period at a rate of 5%, and patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (setting suggestion) at a rate of 33%. Low)}, pattern PT5-Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3% In, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 29%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a ratio of 6%, and a ratio of 55%. In, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

Further, when it is determined in step S318 that the fluctuation pattern is not normal reach, that is, it is super reach, whether or not the variable display during effect is executed in the second period is determined based on the specified fluctuation pattern and the set value. The effect type (effect pattern) to be executed is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super reach) (not shown) (step S320).

As shown in FIG. 59-21 (C), in step S320, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution by using the variable display effect execution decision table for super reach. To do. Specifically, in the case of the setting value 1 and the setting value 6, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and does not execute. Do not decide. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( For high), the execution rate is set to increase as the set value increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-23, paying attention to the case of super reach regarding the variable display advance notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In this case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 36%, and 4%. The ratio was determined to be pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55% to determine pattern PT-9 { Reach notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 35.8%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 35.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 5%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 33.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 6.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 5%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 59-20, it is determined in step S319 or step S320 whether or not the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined (step S321), and if the execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern). (Any of PT-1 to PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S322), and a variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined is set. Then (step S323), the effect during variable display ends. If the execution is not decided in step S321, that is, if the non-execution is decided, the variable display during effect ends.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period of the plurality of times, the installation value is 1 to 1 regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. When deciding whether or not to execute the setting suggestion based on which of 6 is used and executing the variable display effect in the second period, it depends on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Reach notice or setting suggestion is determined based on a separate judgment table. That is, since the criteria for determining whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Further, since the execution rate of the setting suggestion in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion is easily executed in the first period, whereas the reach notice is given in the second period. Is easier to execute, so even though it becomes normal reach or super reach in the second period, the setting suggestion does not become easier to execute in both the first period and the second period, and , Since the reach notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is not easily executed in the second period, the setting suggestion and the reach notice can be executed in a well-balanced manner.

Further, since the execution rate of the reach notice in the second period is higher than the execution rate of the reach notice in the first period, it is variablely displayed by executing the reach notice in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the medium production from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIGS. 59-22 to 59-24, paying attention to each set value, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not included. When the execution of the reach notice is decided at the same ratio (40%) and the variable display effect is executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is decided at the same ratio (60%). Therefore, in the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display in effect executed in the second period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the reach notice is executed. The player can be noticed in the same way.

In addition, even if the set value is set high (for example, set values 5 and 6), in the case of normal reach or super reach, not only is the reach notice easier to execute than the setting suggestion in the second period, but also the super reach In this case, the reach notice (high) is likely to be executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation for a big hit.

Furthermore, even if the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed than in the case where the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the first period. Even when is executed, the player's expectation for the high setting can be increased.

Further, in the first period, when the set value is 1, the execution of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined at the same ratio, whereas when the set value is 6, that is, the set values are 1, 2, The higher the setting is in the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution of the setting suggestion is determined than the reach notice. Therefore, the higher the setting, the easier it is for the setting suggestion to appear. It will be easier to predict.

In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59-21, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) in the first period and in the second period. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at different ratios depending on whether the variable display effect (the second variable display effect) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The execution of the reach notice may be determined at the same ratio depending on whether the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period or the variable display effect in the second period. .. By doing so, it is possible to make the player similarly expect the execution of the reach notice in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59-21, if the effect is during the variable display of the same number of times, the reach notice is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the form to be determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display during the same number of times, the reach notice is executed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be determined at different rates. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being determined between the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect becomes monotonous. It can be suppressed.

(Modification 2 of Examples 2 to 4)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the effect embodiment A, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and the normal reach changes from the start timing of the variable display to the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. An example has been made in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period up to the start timing of the reach effect and the second period after the first period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, the variable display of one variable display is simulated multiple times. It may be executed at the timing corresponding to the re-variation of the decorative pattern in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect shown as.

For example, as shown in FIG. 59-25 as a modification 2, from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach / small hit, normal reach and super reach. Therefore, the first period before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, the second period after the first period and corresponding to the revariable display period after the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol, and The variable display effect can be executed in the third period, which is later than the second period and corresponds to the revariable display period after the third temporary stop of the decorative symbol.

In the second modification, the first period is exemplified before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is the first time. The second period is executed according to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the second period is executed in response to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the second decorative symbol, and the third period is executed in response to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. It may be executed according to the revariable display.

In the second modification, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, any of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set for the first period regardless of which the fluctuation pattern is. Variable display is being performed according to whether it is set to. For the second and third periods, variable display is being performed based on the set value only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Executes the process of determining the type of effect.

Specifically, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the fluctuation pattern (the execution of the reach notice is not determined). It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set. In the second period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set. In the third period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is not determined. It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set.

In addition, while the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the second period and the third period is set to be lower than the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, the reach notice is determined in the first period. By setting the ratio for determining the reach notice in the second period and the third period to be higher than the ratio, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed. Become.

As described above, in the present modification 2, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period and the second period and the second. When the variable display effect is executed in the three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variation pattern. That is, since the determination criteria when the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the predetermined effect differs between the first period and the second period or the third period, it is possible to prevent the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

More specifically, the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect is a fluctuation pattern in which the expectation of a big hit increases as the number of revariable displays increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, .... Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first revariable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, and the second revariable display is performed. In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is a possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is executed prior to the reach notice, and the third revariation is performed. In the third period corresponding to the display, since the fluctuation pattern has a high possibility of super reach, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

By doing so, it is possible to suggest the setting while suppressing the frequent occurrence of reach notice and the decrease in the reliability of the reach notice in the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by one or two pseudo continuous effects. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the big hit from being lowered due to the frequent occurrence of setting suggestions in the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by three pseudo-continuous effects.

Further, in the present modification 2, in the first period when the jackpot reliability is the lowest, the setting suggestion is preferable because the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the second period and the third period when the jackpot reliability is higher than the first period, the execution of the reach notice is set according to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach than the suggestion. Since the decision is given priority, the player's expectation for the big hit can be suitably increased.

In the second modification, the mode in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 100% is illustrated in the first period, but the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period. If so, it does not have to determine the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100%. Further, in the second period, the embodiment in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice is illustrated, but the execution of the reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. Further, in the third period, the form in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100% is illustrated, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate higher than the setting suggestion, the reach notice is announced. The execution does not have to be determined at a 100% rate.

Further, in the present modification 2, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, and in the second period and the third period, the fluctuation pattern is determined. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to whether is normal reach or super reach is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period and the second period are not limited thereto. Then, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value, and in the third period, the reach notice is executed according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach. May be prioritized over the setting suggestion.

Further, in the present modification 2, the embodiment in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined prior to the reach notice according to the set value is illustrated in the first period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of the present inventions are used. In the first number of times (for example, the first period or the second period), if at least the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the set value, the setting suggestion or the setting suggestion or the change pattern is determined according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern. The reach notice may be decided.

Further, in the second modification, in the second period and the third period, the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern is illustrated. It is not limited, and in the second number (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first number among the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or the reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If there is, the setting suggestion or reach notice may be determined according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern.

Further, in Examples 2 to 4, as the variable display effect to be executed in the first period, the setting suggestion is made by making the ratio at which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined higher than the ratio at which the reach notice is determined. Although the embodiment in which execution is prioritized and determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 59-2 as Example 1, the variable display executed in the first period is in progress. As the effect, the execution of the setting suggestion may be prioritized and determined according to the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

Further, in the second to fourth embodiments, as the variable display effect to be executed in the second period, the reach notice is announced by making the ratio at which the execution of the reach notice is determined higher than the ratio at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although the embodiment in which the execution is prioritized is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 59-2 as the first embodiment, the variable display to be executed in the second period is in progress. As the effect, the execution of the reach notice may be prioritized and determined according to the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

Although the production embodiment A has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention. ..

For example, in the production embodiment A, a mode in which the variable display during production can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reach notices and setting suggestions are given. It may be feasible over a variable display.

Specifically, the CPU 103 holds and stores information about the variable display whose execution is suspended when the start winning prize occurs (for example, a display result (including a jackpot type) or a random number value for determining a fluctuation pattern). The display result and the fluctuation pattern are pre-read and determined based on the extracted random number value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 can be used. When the pre-reading notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended) can be executed, the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is displayed. A reach notice or a setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for a target change may be executed over a plurality of variable displays until the start.

Further, in the effect embodiment A, the effect control CPU 120 displays 277 variable displays of a plurality of images Z1 indicating the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the variable display effect at a predetermined timing. An example of a mode in which a process of executing a process of destroying and changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the medium effect determination process into images Z2 indicating that the images Z1 are dropped has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and when the operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) by the player is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 is changed at the timing corresponding to the operation. You may let it.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player as described above in the variable display effect, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. As the operation promotion effect for prompting, an operation promotion image (for example, a character image or a button image of "continuous hitting!") May be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B when a specific operation for operating the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated, the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. In that case, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be terminated without giving a reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, the player who knows the specific motion can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

As an operation promoting effect for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B, an operation promoting image for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the variable display effect is executed without displaying the operation promotion image in the display area of the image display device 5 in which the variable display effect is executed. Even if the operation promotion effect is executed by emitting light from a light emitting unit built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. Good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific movement or the player who notices the light emission can see the reach notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the production example A, as a predetermined production in which the production result is an advantageous state suggestion result, a mode in which a reach notice suggesting the possibility of reaching is applied is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The predetermined effect, which is the result of suggesting an advantageous state, is a stop symbol notice that suggests at which symbol the variable display symbol stops, a character notice in which a character appears, and a step in which the notice image changes stepwise. Various advance notices can be applied as long as they are suggestive effects that suggest the possibility of a big hit, such as up notices and group notices in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area.

Further, in the effect embodiment A, the variable display effect has a common effect period for the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the effect mode is different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (corresponding to the common effect period). It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach notice and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion unlike the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 for the same period (same timing). In this case, for example, the visibility of the first effect image is made larger than the display area of the second effect image, or the display mode such as emission color, brightness, and contrast is different. Is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, so that the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

When the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image on a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn on the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers and is set. When drawing the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion in the second drawing layer lower than the first drawing layer, the image display device 5 draws the image drawn in the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer. When the images are combined and displayed in duplicate, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image because the first effect image is duplicated in the second effect image. Therefore, it is possible to execute the reach notice in preference to the setting suggestion. Further, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound effects such as the volume and sound quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice corresponds to the setting suggestion. It may be higher than the audibility of, that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice may be easier to hear than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of increasing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only the volume of the sound effect is increased, but also the volume of other sounds such as BGM is decreased to enhance the audibility. May be good. It should be noted that the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any of the reproduction channels. In, for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the reach notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. At the same time, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (first reproduction channel and second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced in the first reproduction channel By making the volume and sound quality different (improving) from the volume and sound quality of the second production sound reproduced on the second playback channel, the audibility of the first production sound is made higher than the audibility of the second production sound. It is also possible to prioritize the reach notice over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the light emitting mode such as the light emitting color, lighting mode, and brightness of the game effect lamp 9 different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice is the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. It may be higher than the sex, that is, the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice may be easier to see than the light emitting mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. It should be noted that the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off without being turned on in response to the setting suggestion.

That is, to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, as described in the above-mentioned production examples A1 to 4 and the modified examples 1 and 2. In this case, not only the execution rate of the reach notice is increased, but also when the effect result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the effect mode such as the reach notice display, sound, and light is more than the setting suggestion effect mode. Includes priority. Furthermore, executing the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, and sound are such that the effect of the reach notice given to the player is higher than the effect of the setting suggestion given to the player. It also includes performing different production modes such as light, light, and movement of a movable body.

Further, in the effect embodiment A, in the setting suggestion, as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, a mode suggesting which of 1 to 6 is set as the set value is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. However, as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, for example, the possibility that the set value has been changed or the possibility that the set value has not been changed (deferred) may be suggested.

Further, in the production embodiment A, a mode in which the jackpot gaming state is applied is illustrated as an example of an advantageous state advantageous for the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize ball is paid out more than in the normal state. High base state (time saving state) where conditions are likely to be satisfied, high probability gaming state (high probability state) with high probability of becoming a big hit game state, high probability low base state (latent probability change state), special reach state (for example) , Super reach, etc.), including the state where the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the production embodiment A, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is a game machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored and stored. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the production embodiment A, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) was applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

(Example B of pachinko gaming machine production)
Next, a production embodiment B executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a setting function capable of setting the setting values described in the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above will be described. In the effect embodiment B, it is possible to execute a notice effect that announces / suggests that the display result will be a big hit (controlled to the big hit game state) during the execution of the variable display, and the appearance rate is appropriately adjusted. Will be done. In addition, in the production embodiment B, in order to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that three stages of 1 to 3 are provided as setting values.

When the variable display is started, whether or not the advance notice effect is executed is determined depending on whether or not the display result is a big hit in the variable display start setting process of step S171 shown in FIG. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose setting can be changed, the larger the setting value, the higher the probability of a big hit. The notice effect (especially the highly reliable notice effect that becomes a big hit) is easy to be executed when the display result becomes a big hit, so if the execution presence or absence is determined at an equal ratio regardless of the set value, the set value The higher the value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect. In this embodiment, the reliability refers to the jackpot reliability, and refers to the ratio of jackpots when the advance notice effect is executed.

Therefore, there is a risk that the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may differ from the intended ones due to blurring due to the set value, or the reliability may change and the player may be confused. Therefore, in the effect embodiment B, at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range by adjusting (changing) the execution rate of the advance notice effect according to the set value. are doing. As a result, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect can be intended, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the advance notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the set value from being unnecessarily suggested depending on the execution frequency of the advance notice effect.

In addition, when adjusting the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect, it may be difficult to completely match the ratio after the decimal point. Therefore, the invention according to the effect embodiment B includes those having the same appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect, as well as those adjusted within substantially the same range. It should be noted that if the range is substantially the same, the same effect as in the case of the same can be obtained. The substantially same range may be within a predetermined range, within a predetermined error range (for example, plus or minus 5%, etc.), or the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect perceived by the player. May be within substantially the same range so that they are perceived to be the same.

FIG. 60-1 is a diagram showing an example of the execution rate, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X as the notice effect in the effect embodiment B. FIG. 60-1 (A) shows an example in the case where the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X are not adjusted. In this embodiment, three stages of "1" to "3" are provided as set values. As shown in FIG. 60-1 (A), in this embodiment, the jackpot probability a is "1/300" when the set value is "1", "1/250" when the set value is "2", and the set value. In the case of "3", it is "1/200". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit is "50/100" regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A (= jackpot probability a × execution ratio b) when the notice X is executed and becomes a big hit is “1/600” when the set value is “1” and the set value “2”. In the case of, it is "1/500", and in the case of the set value "3", it is "1/400".

The loss probability c (= 1-big hit probability a) is "299/300" when the set value is "1", "249/250" when the set value is "2", and "199" when the set value is "3". / 200 ". The execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "1/100". Therefore, the rate (ratio to total variation) B (= loss probability c × execution rate d) at which the notice X is executed and becomes a loss is about “1/100” at any set value.

The appearance rate C (= A + B) of the notice X in total variation is "7/600" when the set value is "1", "6/500" when the set value is "2", and "5" when the set value is "3". It is "/ 400". The reliability D (= A / C) of the notice X is "1/7" (about 14%) when the set value is "1" and "1/6" (about 17%) when the set value is "2". ), When the set value is "3", it is "1/5" (20%).

In this way, when the execution rate of the notice effect (notice X) is the same regardless of the set value without adjustment, the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect. In particular, when the reliability is based on the case of the set value "2", an error of about plus or minus 3% occurs.

FIG. 60-1 (B) shows an example when the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X are adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (B), unlike the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (A), the execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit is "60/100" when the set value is "1". When the set value is "2", it is "50/100", and when the set value is "3", it is "40/100". Further, the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "3/299" when the set value is "1", "2.5 / 249" when the set value is "2", and "2" when the set value is "3". / 199 ".

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in total variation becomes "6/500" regardless of the set value. Further, the reliability D of the notice X is "1/6" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect from changing according to the set value, resulting in an unintended ratio, and the advance notice effect can be preferably executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the advance notice effect.

In this embodiment, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value as the notice effect, but a comparison like the notice X among a plurality of types of notice effects is made. Such adjustments are made for highly reliable notice effects and special notice effects (that is, some notice effects) that are the highlights, and for other notice effects, the execution ratio is not adjusted, depending on the set value. The appearance rate and reliability may be changed. That is, other notice effects may be executed at the same execution ratio regardless of the set value. By doing so, compared to the case where the appearance rate and reliability are adjusted for all the notice effects, the burden of adjusting the appearance rate and reliability is generated, and the processing burden of determining whether or not the notice effects are executed is generated. Can be prevented from increasing.

In the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is different, but even if they are the same as shown in FIG. 60-1 (A), the notice X is The rate B that is executed and becomes a loss is "1/100", which is substantially the same for all the set values, and the appearance rate C of the notice X is also substantially the same (about 1.17% to 1.25%). , The execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

In this case, by adjusting only the execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit, the appearance rate C and the reliability D of the notice X can be set to the same or substantially the same range. In this way, by making the execution rate of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of the total variation, common, it is not necessary to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution rate different. The control burden for executing is reduced.

FIG. 60-1 (C) shows an example when the appearance rates of the notice X are adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (C), unlike the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (A), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "2.5 / 299" when the set value is "1". , "2/149" when the set value is "2", and "1.5 / 199" when the set value is "3". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in total variation becomes "6/500" regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or suggesting the set value unnecessarily depending on the execution frequency of the advance notice effect. Further, the occupancy rate of the notice X in the case of a big hit can be made common, and a suitable appearance rate in the case of a big hit can be maintained.

In this case, the appearance rate C of the notice X is common regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. 60-3 (C), the reliability of the notice X changes according to the set value. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. Further, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the reliability can be estimated and the set value can also be estimated, so that the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be expected to improve. By matching the appearance rates, the reliability according to the set value may change relatively large (about plus or minus 10%) such as 30% to 50%. This makes it easier to guess the set value.

FIG. 60-1 (D) shows an example in which the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (D), unlike the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (A), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "2.5 / 299" when the set value is "1". , "2.5 / 249" when the set value is "2", and "2.5 / 199" when the set value is "3". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the reliability D of the notice X becomes "1/6" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the same reliability can be notified by the notice X regardless of the set value. Further, the occupancy rate of the notice X in the case of a big hit can be made common, and a suitable appearance rate in the case of a big hit can be maintained.

In this case, the reliability D of the notice X is common regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. 60-3 (D), the appearance rate of the notice X changes according to the set value. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. Further, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the set value can be estimated, so that the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be expected to improve.

In addition, in FIG. 60-1 (D), the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same regardless of the set value by making the execution rate of the notice X at the time of loss different according to the set value. However, by assuming that the execution rate of the notice X at the time of loss is the same regardless of the set value and the execution rate of the notice X at the time of a big hit is different according to the set value, the reliability of the notice X is the same regardless of the set value. It may be adjusted so as to be. In this way, by making the execution rate of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of the total variation, common, it is not necessary to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution rate different. The control burden for executing is reduced.

The jackpot probabilities a shown in FIGS. 60-1 (A) to 60-1 and the adjustment examples of the advance notice execution ratios b and d are examples. In order to make at least one of the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value, the appearance rate C and the reliability D should be the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value. In addition, at least one of the advance notice execution ratios b and d may be changed according to the set value. That is, when the appearance rate C is the same (substantially the same), the execution rate of the notice is such that the appearance rate C = a × b + (1-a) × d is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value. At least one of b and d may be adjusted. When the reliability D of the advance notice effect is the same (substantially the same), the reliability D of the advance notice effect D = (a × b) / (a × b + (1-a) × d) regardless of the set value. At least one of the advance notice execution ratios b and d may be adjusted so that they are the same (substantially the same).

In the execution ratio shown in FIG. 60-1, the execution ratio according to the jackpot type was not considered, but when there are a plurality of jackpot types, the execution ratio of the notice effect (notice X) is set according to the jackpot type. It may be different. For example, the jackpot probability a is the same as that shown in FIG. 60-1, and there are normal jackpots and probabilistic jackpots as jackpot types, and when the jackpot is equal to any of the jackpot types (50%). explain.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (A), the normal jackpot probability a1 and the probability variation jackpot probability a2 are each half of the jackpot probability a in FIG. 60-1. Then, in this example, the execution ratio b1 of the notice X at the time of a normal big hit is "60/100" when the set value is "1", "50/100" when the set value is "2", and the set value "3". In the case, it is "40/100". Therefore, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A1 (= normal jackpot probability a1 x execution ratio b1) at which the notice X is executed and becomes a normal jackpot is "1/1000" regardless of the set value.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (A), the execution ratio b2 of the notice X at the time of the probability variation big hit is 50/100 (unadjusted) regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A2 (= probability variation jackpot probability a2 x execution ratio b2) when the notice X is executed and becomes a probability variation jackpot is "1/1200" when the set value is "1", and the set value " In the case of "2", it is "1/1000", and in the case of the set value "3", it is "1/800". Then, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A (= A1 + A2) in which the notice X is executed and becomes a big hit is "44/24000" when the set value is "1" and "48/24000" when the set value is "2". , In the case of the set value "3", it is "54/24000".

Then, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is “196 / (299 × 80)” when the set value is “1” and “2” when the set value is “2”. 192 / (249 × 96) ”, and in the case of the set value“ 3 ”, it is“ 186 / (199 × 120) ”. Therefore, the rate at which the notice X is executed and the result is lost (ratio to the total variation) is "196/24000" when the set value is "1", "192/24000" when the set value is "2", and the set value " In the case of "3", it is "186/24000".

As a result of the above, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (D), the appearance rate C (= A + B) of the notice X in total variation is "1/100" regardless of the set value. In this way, when there are multiple jackpot types, by making the execution rate of the notice effect different for each jackpot type, the appearance rate of the notice effect can be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. It may be. By doing so, when the advance notice effect is executed while the execution rate of the advance notice effect is within the same or substantially the same range, the ratio of which jackpot type is used differs depending on the set value. It is expected that a specific jackpot (for example, a probabilistic jackpot) will be obtained by executing the advance notice effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 60-2, the appearance rate of the notice X was adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by making the execution rate of the notice X at the time of a normal big hit different, but other big hit types and loss. The appearance rate C of the notice X may be adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by making the execution rate of the time different. That is, d may be adjusted with at least one of the advance notice execution rates b1 and b2 so that the appearance rate C = a1 × b1 + a2 × b2 + c × d of the notice X is the same (substantially the same).

Further, the reliability D of the notice X may be the same (substantially the same) by making the execution rate of the notice X different according to the jackpot type. In this case, the reliability D = (a1 × b1 + a2 × b2) / (a1 × b1 + a2 × b2 + ((1-a1-a2) × d)) of the advance notice effect is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value. As described above, at least one of the advance notice execution ratios b1 and b2 and d may be adjusted. By doing so, the advance notice effect is executed while keeping the reliability of the advance notice effect within the same or substantially the same range. In this case, since the ratio of which jackpot type is selected differs depending on the set value, it is expected that a specific jackpot (for example, a probabilistic jackpot) will be obtained by executing the advance notice effect according to the set value.

Further, for some of the advance notice effects, the execution rate of the specific jackpot type may be executed at the same execution rate regardless of the set value. For example, there are two types of jackpots, a normal jackpot and a probabilistic jackpot (50% of the distribution of the jackpot type), and as a preview effect, a notice Y for notifying that the jackpot will be a probabilistic jackpot may be executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60-3, in the case of a normal big hit or loss, the execution ratio of the notice Y is 0/100 (0%) regardless of the set value. On the other hand, the execution rate b2 of the notice Y at the time of the probability variation big hit is "60/100" when the set value is "1", "50/100" when the set value is "2", and "40 / 100" when the set value is "3". It is "100". The jackpot probability is the same as the example shown in FIG. 60-1. Therefore, the appearance rate of the total variation notice Y is "1/1000" regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice Y notifying that the probability variation jackpot will occur at the time of the probability variation jackpot at the same appearance rate regardless of the set value. In addition, it can be announced that it will be a probable change jackpot regardless of the set value. Further, in the case of a normal big hit, the notice Y is not executed regardless of the set value, so that the processing load can be reduced. Although not shown, the reliability is 100% because the notice Y is executed only at the time of the probability change big hit.

A notice effect for notifying that it will be a probable big hit may be executed at the time of loss. For example, as a notice effect, when the notice Z for notifying that the probability variation big hit will be executed is executed, as shown in FIG. 60-4, in the case of the normal big hit, the execution rate of the notice Z is 0 regardless of the set value. It becomes / 100 (0%). On the other hand, the execution rate b2 of the notice Z at the time of the probabilistic big hit is the same as the execution rate of the notice Y shown in FIG. 60-3, and the rate at which the notice Z is executed and becomes a big hit is "1" regardless of the set value. It is "/ 1000". The execution ratio d of the notice Z at the time of loss is "3/2990" when the set value is "1", "2.5 / 2490" when the set value is "2", and "2" when the set value is "3". / 1990 ". The ratio B at which the notice Y is executed and the result is lost is "1/1000" in any of the set values.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice Z in total variation becomes "2/1000" regardless of the set value. Further, the reliability D of the notice Z is "1/2" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the notice Z from changing according to the set value and becoming an unintended ratio, and if a big hit occurs, a notice that the probability change big hit will be announced. Z can be preferably performed. Further, in the case of a normal big hit, the notice Z is not executed regardless of the set value, so that the processing load can be reduced. It should be noted that either the appearance rate of the notice Z or the reliability may differ depending on the set value.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect in the effect embodiment B will be described. The lower arrow in FIG. 60-5 (A) indicates that the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" of the image display device 5. It shows that there is. When it is decided to execute the notice X as the notice effect, the character image CHα as shown in FIG. 60-5 (B) is the line "chance" during the execution of each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Notice X is executed. This allows the player to recognize that there is a high possibility that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state. In particular, when the reliability is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, the player can recognize that there is a high possibility that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state without being aware of the set value. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 60-5 (C), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are stopped, and the reach is established. Then, as shown in FIG. 60-5 (D), the characters "Super Reach!" Are displayed, and for example, as shown in FIG. 60-5 (E), the reach effect of the super reach in which the characters confront each other is displayed. To be started. During the reach effect of the super reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 60-5 (E), the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5.

Then, for example, immediately before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 60-5 (F), the notice Y or the notice Z in which the character image CHβ issues the line "probability change !?" is executed. To. As a result, the player expects to be a probabilistic jackpot. In particular, if it is a notice Y, it will be confirmed that it will be a probable change jackpot, so that the interest will be improved.

In addition, when both the notice Y and the notice Z can be executed, it is a production that gives a notice and suggests that both of them will be a probable change jackpot, but the display color and the lines of the lines are so that the player can distinguish them. It is preferable to make some production modes such as contents different.

After that, when the display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 60-5 (G), it is displayed that the ally character has won, and as shown in FIG. 60-5 (H), with the big hit combination. The decorative pattern is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the effect mode of the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 60-5 is an example, and any effect mode may be used as long as it can suggest and give notice that a big hit or a probabilistic big hit will occur.

(Modification of Production Example B)
The above-mentioned production embodiment B can be variously modified and applied, and further features may be added. Further, not all of the configurations described in the above-mentioned production embodiment B are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. In addition, other features such as Production Example A may be combined as appropriate.

In the production embodiment B, three stages of 1 to 3 are provided as the set value, but the set value may be 2 stages or less or 4 stages or more (for example, 6 stages). Further, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the jackpot probability is for the player, but the smaller the set value is, the more advantageous the jackpot probability is for the player. Further, the jackpot probability according to the set value shown in FIG. 60-1 and the like is also an example, and the jackpot probability may be a stepwise according to the set value.

In the effect embodiment B, the execution rate of the advance notice effect is set so that at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect of all the set values (set values 1 to 3) is within the same or substantially the same range. However, of the multiple types of setting values, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of some of the setting values should be within the same or substantially the same range. You may. For example, even if at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of the first set value (for example, set value 1) and the second set value (for example, set value 2) is within the same or substantially the same range. Good. Further, when the set value is in 6 stages, at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect of the first set value group (for example, set values 1 to 3) is set to be the same or substantially the same range. , At least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of the second set value group (for example, set values 4 to 6) may be the same or substantially the same range.

In the production embodiment B, as the specific production, at least a part of the advance notice effects are set to be the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, but the specific production is controlled to an advantageous state. It may be another production that suggests that. For example, when the type of reach effect and the number of pseudo-reams are determined on the side of the effect control board 12, the type of reach effect and the determination ratio of the number of pseudo-reams are different depending on the set value. The appearance rate and reliability of each reach effect, and the appearance rate and reliability of each pseudo-ream number may be controlled to be the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value.

Further, when determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, a table to which different execution ratios are assigned to each set value may be used to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, or to determine the advance notice effect. A reference table may be provided, a table corresponding to the set value may be calculated in the table, and a table corresponding to the set value may be generated, and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed may be determined using the generated table.

The execution rate, appearance rate, and reliability of the advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 60-1 to 60-4 are examples, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Further, as the advance notice effect, other advance notice effects other than the advance notice effect shown in the effect embodiment B may be feasible. In such other notice effects, the appearance rate and reliability may be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set value, and some or all of the other notice effects may be set to the set value. Regardless, the appearance rate and reliability may be changed according to the set value as the same execution rate. For example, among the notice effects, for the notice effects with relatively high reliability, the appearance rate and reliability are set to be the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, and the reliability is relatively low or the appearance rate is low. For high notice effects, the same execution rate may be used regardless of the set value. By doing so, as compared with the case where the appearance rate and reliability of all the advance notice effects are within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, the control burden regarding the execution presence / absence of the advance notice effects is reduced. Can be mitigated.

In addition, for a specific advance notice effect among a plurality of types of advance notice effects, it is executed even if some setting values are lost, and if it is another set value, it is not executed (or is executed) if it is lost. It may be difficult). For example, a specific advance notice effect with high reliability (for example, jackpot probability of 90% or more) is not executed at the time of loss in the case of a low setting value (for example, 1 to 3 in the case of 6 stages), and a high setting value (for example, In the case of 4 to 6) in the case of 6 steps, it may be possible to execute at the time of loss. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect by losing even though the specific advance notice effect is executed, and it is possible to suggest and notify that the set value is high.

In the figures shown in FIGS. 60-1 and 60-2, the execution ratio of the notice X is shown as the notice effect, but after deciding whether or not to execute the notice effect according to the display result, the type of the notice effect (effect pattern). ) May be determined. In this case, when determining the type of advance notice effect, the execution ratio of each advance notice effect is set to the set value so that the appearance rate and reliability of each advance notice effect are within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. It may be different depending on it.

In the production embodiment B, whether or not the advance notice is executed is determined regardless of the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss, but at the time of loss, it depends on the fluctuation pattern (presence / absence and type of reach, presence / absence and number of pseudo-reams). , The execution rate of the notice effect may be different.

In the effect embodiment B, the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state is not considered, but even in the probabilistic state, the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. .. Further, depending on the game state, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. For example, in a probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability of a big hit is high and the advance notice effect is easily executed, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. Such adjustment may not be performed in the normal state (low probability state). Further, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect (specific advance notice effect) may be different between different gaming states, or may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range. For example, if it is difficult to distinguish between the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state due to the common background, etc. ) May be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range. Further, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game state in which the appearance is indistinguishable from being recognized depending on the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect.

In the production embodiment B, when there are a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot as the jackpot type, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice production are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value according to the jackpot type. It was. The difference in the jackpot type may be the difference in the number of rounds of the jackpot, or the difference in the length of the time saving state or the probability variation state controlled by the jackpot gaming state.

When a small hit is provided as a display result and the advance notice effect is executed even when the small hit occurs, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect at the time of a big hit or a loss is made different according to the set value as in the effect embodiment B. In addition, by making the execution rate of the notice effect at the time of a small hit different according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect can be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. Good. For example, in a gaming machine in which a specific area is provided in the winning opening opened in the small hit game state and the game machine is controlled to the big hit game state based on passing through the specific area in the small hit game state, it is announced that the small hit will be obtained. Since it can be said that the advance notice effect is a big hit, the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect for notifying the small hit may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. In this case, when the small hit probability is changed according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect are changed by changing the execution rate of the notice effect in consideration of the small hit probability according to the set value. You can adjust the degree. Specifically, by considering the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability according to the set value, the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss is made different according to the set value. The appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value.

If the advance notice effect can be executed for each of the multiple variations of the pseudo-ream, the appearance rate and reliability are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value only for the advance notice effect in the final change of the pseudo-ream. You may. By doing so, it is possible to easily design the advance notice effect and reduce the processing load as compared with the case of adjusting the appearance rate and the reliability for all the fluctuations of the pseudo-ream.

In the effect embodiment B, only the jackpot probability changes depending on the set value, but the effect mode and the effect execution ratio may be different depending on the set value on the side of the effect control board 12. For example, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, different reach effects, pseudo-reams, and other effects during variable display may be executed based on the set values. By doing so, it is possible to suggest a set value for the effect mode by the execution rate of the effect.

(Third Embodiment)
Next, a third embodiment according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description will be described. In the third embodiment, a command in the game control microcomputer 100 for compressing the code capacity, a feature of the processing, and the like will be described. The third embodiment can be applied to each configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment (including the respective modifications AD) and the second embodiment.

FIG. 61-1 shows an example of the address map of the memory area used by the game control microcomputer 100 (see FIG. 3) of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 61-1, the memory area used by the game control microcomputer 100 includes a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the ROM 101 and a memory area (F000H to FFFFH) allocated to the RAM 102. Including.

The memory area of the ROM 101 includes a code area (inside the area), a data area, and a code area (outside the area), and an unused area is included between the respective areas. The code area (inside the area) is an in-area program area in which an in-area program including a game program related to the progress of the game is stored. The data area is a game data area in which game data used by a program in the area is stored, and a plurality of table format data used according to the progress of the game are stored in an area starting from a specific address (1000H). .. The code area (outside the area) is an out-of-area program area in which an out-of-area program including a non-game program not involved in the progress of the game is stored.

The progress of the game is to proceed with a series of processes constituting the game, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 reads out the jackpot determination value for the jackpot lottery and determines the fluctuation pattern for determining the fluctuation pattern. It is possible to proceed with processing such as reference to the table and reference to the opening / closing table of the grand prize opening. Therefore, when the game progresses in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the code area (inside the area) and the data area used for the progress of the game are the code areas (outside the area) used regardless of the progress of the game. Compared to, it is an area that is frequently used.

The code area (inside the area) related to the progress of the game and the code area (outside the area) not related to the progress of the game are separately allocated, and the code area (outside the area) is rearward in the storage area of the ROM 101. Is allocated to, and at least 16 bytes or more of unused area is allocated to the front area. Therefore, the code area (inside the area) related to the progress of the game and the code area (outside the area) not related to the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

The front and back of the above-mentioned storage area are the magnitude relations of the address values assigned to the storage area, and the smaller address is the front and the larger address is the rear. Therefore, the storage area allocated after the one storage area corresponds to the storage area having an address value larger than that of the one storage area, and the storage area allocated before the one storage area. , A storage area whose address value is smaller than that of one storage area is applicable.

The memory area of the RAM 102 is a built-in RAM area (F000H to F400H) that can be used as a work, and a built-in register area (FE00H) in which a group of registers for controlling each function mounted on the game control microcomputer 100 is stored. ~ FEBFH) and unused areas (F401H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) whose access is prohibited.

The in-region program can read, for example, read the judgment value of the big hit lottery, refer to the fluctuation pattern determination table, refer to the opening / closing table of the big winning opening, and perform the power failure processing (return to the state before the power failure when the power failure occurs). Processing programs for processing), various error processing, etc. are included. Further, the out-of-area program includes, for example, a processing program such as a test signal output process (a process of outputting a test signal generated in connection with the result of the game) and a display process of the display monitor 29.

(Initial setting process)
Next, the detailed processing of the initial setting in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, in the initial setting described in the basic description (see step S2 in FIG. 4), the initial setting process shown in FIG. 61-2 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 61-2, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 sets the registers of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.) (step S2A), and accesses the RAM 102. (Step S2B), set a pointer to a specific address (step S2C), and initialize the stack pointer (step S2D). Here, the specific address is an address used for the LDT command described later, and by setting the pointer in the process of step S2C of the initial setting process (that is, when the power is turned on), the LDT command is relative to the specific address. It is possible to specify the address only by the value.

The above-mentioned initial setting process can also be applied to the initial setting described in the first embodiment (see step Sa002 in FIG. 29).

(Specific instruction processing)
Next, the specific instruction processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. The specific instruction processing is a processing that is executed when a program related to the progress of the game is executed, a program that is particularly frequently used is executed, or data that is frequently used is read out accordingly. Therefore, the specific instruction processing can be executed by the program in the area stored in the code area (inside the area), and is not executed by the program outside the area stored in the code area (outside the area). Examples of frequently used programs include processing programs such as reading a jackpot judgment value for a jackpot lottery, referencing a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern, and referring to an opening / closing table for a jackpot. However, as an example, an example in which a specific instruction process is executed as a read process of the jackpot determination value will be described with reference to FIG. 61-3.

As shown in FIG. 61-3, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the game control microcomputer 100 is stored in the data area (table area) during execution of the jackpot determination value reading processing program (program related to the progress of the game). When reading a value (big hit judgment value), instead of specifying all the addresses of the data area in which the data is stored, only the relative value from the specific address is specified by using the LDT command (step Sx1). .. Then, the CPU 103 identifies the address in which the jackpot determination value is stored based on the specific address set in the pointer and the relative value specified by the LDT command, and reads out the jackpot determination value (step Sx2).

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 100 reads the jackpot determination value stored in the data area (table area) during the execution of the jackpot determination value reading processing program, the data is read. It is possible to use the LDT command to read the jackpot determination value by specifying only the relative value from the specific address instead of specifying all the addresses of the data area in which is stored. The LDT instruction will be described in more detail below with reference to FIG. 61-4. FIG. 61-4 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of reading out the jackpot determination value using the LD command for comparison, and FIG. 61-4 (2) shows the jackpot determination value using the LDT command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of reading.

The game control microcomputer 100 usually uses an LD instruction (for example, when executing an out-of-area program or a program that is infrequently used) as an instruction to read data stored in a data area. The LD instruction is an instruction to read the data stored at the address specified in the main routine or the subroutine into the specified register. The game control microcomputer 100 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD instruction, and stores the read data in the register specified by the LD instruction.

However, when reading the game data that is particularly frequently used among the game data stored in the ROM 101 from the data area of the ROM 101, it is necessary to specify the address every time in the LD instruction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61-4 (1), when the game control microcomputer 100 acquires the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination value reading processing program, the LD instruction is used to obtain the address 1xxxH of the ROM 101. It is necessary to specify and store the number of judgment values in the HL register. Therefore, when the LD instruction is used, it is necessary to process a 3-byte instruction every time the number of determination values is read from the ROM 101. In the data area of the ROM 101, a plurality of table format data used according to the progress of the game are stored in the area starting from the specific address 1000H.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, the LDT command is used instead of the LD command in the program that reads the game data that is particularly frequently used among the game data stored in the ROM 101 from the data area of the ROM 101. In the LDT command, the start address of the data area in which the game data is stored is set in advance as a specific address, so when reading data from the data area, it is only necessary to specify a relative value from the specific address. Therefore, when the LDT command is used, it is possible to read the game data with a smaller amount of data as compared with the normal LD command for reading the data by specifying the address, and when reading these game data, the address is used. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying and reduce the code capacity.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61-4 (2), the game control microcomputer 100 uses data as a specific address in the process of step S2C (see FIG. 61-2) of the initial setting process when the power is turned on. The pointer of the start address 1000H of the area is set in advance. Then, when the game control microcomputer 100 acquires the jackpot determination value in a program for reading the jackpot determination value, which is an example of a program that is used more frequently than other programs, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the LDT instruction instead of the LD instruction. .. In the LDT instruction, the relative value (xxxH) from the specific address 1000H is specified without specifying the address 1xxxH of the ROM 101, and the jackpot determination value is stored in the HL register. When the LDT instruction is used, it is sufficient to specify only the relative value without specifying the address each time the jackpot determination value is read from the ROM 101, so that only a 2-byte instruction needs to be processed. Therefore, when the LDT instruction is used, it is possible to read the game data with a data amount one byte less than that of the normal LD instruction, and it is a waste of the program to specify the address when reading these game data. Can be reduced and the code capacity can be compressed.

The specific address may be set only by the hardware-like automatic setting performed when the power is turned on and the power supply is started for the game machine 1, or the setting by the user program executed at the start of the user program. May be only.

Further, the program using the LDT instruction is a program that is used more frequently than other programs, and in the above description, it is assumed that the program is used in the jackpot determination value reading processing program as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the LDT instruction may be used for a processing program such as a reference to a table for determining a fluctuation pattern and a reference to an opening / closing table of a large winning opening. Further, for example, the LDT instruction may be used in a program that reads data from the data area for each fluctuation (one game). The LDT instruction can also be applied to slot machines. For example, in a slot machine, reading the number of winning combination judgment values, drawing an AT, reading a transition judgment value in an advantageous state, reading a freeze judgment value, updating the display of a 7-segment display, and referring to a reel stop table. The LDT instruction can be used for a processing program such as.

In the above, the LDT instruction is used in the in-region program, but is limited so as not to be used in the out-of-region program. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the LDT instruction may be used in both the intra-regional program and the out-of-region program.

(Explanation of association of a plurality of examples)
As described above, various embodiments (examples and modifications) have been described, but the configurations according to each embodiment may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations related to other embodiments. .. The configurations thus combined, or the individual configurations that are not combined, may be optionally combined with some or all of the configurations for other embodiments.

For example, the configuration according to the modification C (the configuration in which the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in a common storage area) and / or the configuration according to the modification D (the configuration in which the timer update process is shared) are modified. It may be combined with the configuration related to B (a configuration in which a specific command obtained by processing numerical data is restored on the effect control side). By doing so, the pressure on the capacity on the main side can be further reduced.

Further, the configuration according to the modified example C (the configuration in which the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in a common storage area) is the configuration of the second embodiment (a pachinko game having a setting function and capable of being controlled in a KT state). It may be combined with the machine 1). Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 which has a setting function and can be controlled to the KT state, in addition to the capacity of the main side (main board 11) being compressed by the setting function, it is small. The frequency of hits increases. Therefore, the configuration according to the modified example C becomes more effective when applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. That is, even if the capacity of the main side (main board 11) is compressed by the setting function and the frequency of small hits is high, the small hit flag different from the big hit flag is LD (loaded) each time. ), So the LD command and the like can be reduced, and the pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced.

Further, the configuration according to the modification D (configuration for sharing the timer update process) may be combined with the configuration of the second embodiment (pachinko gaming machine 1 having a setting function and capable of being controlled in the KT state). Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 which has a setting function and can be controlled to the KT state, in addition to the capacity of the main side (main board 11) being compressed by the setting function, it is small. The frequency of hits increases. Therefore, the configuration according to the modified example D becomes more effective when applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. That is, since the capacity of the main side (main board 11) is compressed by having the setting function and the frequency of small hits is high, even if the subroutine related to the small hit is called frequently, it is used in the subroutine. Since the timer value to be updated is updated by one timer update process, the compression efficiency of the process is high, and the pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced.

Further, the configuration of the modified example C and the configuration of the modified example D may be combined with the configuration of the first embodiment or the second embodiment (pachinko gaming machine 1 having a setting function). In this way, by combining the modified example C and the modified example D, it is possible to reduce the pressure in the gaming machine in which the capacity on the main side is compressed by providing the setting function.

Further, the third embodiment can be applied to each configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment (including the respective modifications AD) and the second embodiment. Therefore, in a game machine in which the capacity on the main side is compressed by providing the setting function, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program and compress the code capacity.

(Explanation of Means for Solving Problems of the Present Invention)
Although various embodiments have been described above, the embodiments described above include the gaming machines described in the means shown below.

The gaming machine described in means A1
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31).
A determination random number value generation means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 154) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
A game control means capable of controlling the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5).
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit is made according to the set set value. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the jackpot numerical range is in a normal state. The part set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the probabilistic state or
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means A2 is the gaming machine according to the means A1.
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means is provided.
The advantageous state determining means reads out the set value information stored in the storage means each time it determines whether or not to control the advantageous state (for example, the step of the special symbol normal processing shown by the CPU 103 in FIG. 39). The part that executes the process of S550), the advantageous state determination value included in the non-common numerical range corresponding to the set value specified from the read set value information, together with the advantageous state determination value included in the common numerical range. It is set as an advantageous state determination value for determining whether or not the determination random number values generated by the determination random value value generation means match (for example, the process of step S556 of the special symbol normal process shown by the CPU 103 in FIG. 39). In the part for setting the display result determination table according to the set value read in the process of step S550)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value is repeatedly set every time it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determination means, so that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is used. It is possible to prevent an inappropriate judgment from being made.

The gaming machine of means A3 is the gaming machine described in means A2.
The storage means can store the set value information read from the storage means by the advantageous state determination means as the determination used set value information (for example, the step of the special symbol normal processing shown by the CPU 103 in FIG. 39). In the process of S566, the part where the set value in the process of step S550 is updated and stored as the determined used set value),
A collation that can collate every predetermined period whether or not the set value information stored in the storage means is the same as the determined used set value information stored in the immediately preceding determination by the advantageous state determination means. It is characterized in that the CPU 103 further includes means (for example, in the process of step S552 shown in FIG. 39, a portion for comparing the set value specified in the process of step S550 with the determined used set value).
According to this feature, it is possible to identify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set by inappropriate setting value information.

The gaming machine of the means A4 is the gaming machine according to the means A3.
The collation means collates each time it determines whether or not the advantageous state determining means controls the advantageous state for the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 executes variable display. The part where the process of step S552 is executed every time)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the collation is performed every time the advantageous state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state, it is possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set.

The gaming machine of means A5 is the gaming machine according to means A3 or means A4.
When the collation result of the collation means is not the same, the error notification means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the error notification that the set value information is abnormal executes the error notification process. Therefore, the image display device 5 is provided with a portion for displaying a notification image according to an error).
According to this feature, it is possible to make the surroundings of the game machine recognize that the set value information is abnormal, and it is possible to quickly deal with the abnormal set value information.

The gaming machine of means A6 is the gaming machine according to means A5.
The game control means controls the game to an incapable game state when the collation results of the collation means are not the same, and also provides error notification information indicating that the set value information is abnormal. Output to the error notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 39, when the CPU 103 determines that the set value and the determined used set value do not match as the comparison result in step S552, the process proceeds to loop processing. Part and the part that executes the process of step S554 and sends an error specification command to the effect control board 12),
The error notification means can execute the error notification based on the output of the error notification information by the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has an error designation command from the CPU 103 in the error notification process. Is determined, and when an error specification command is received, an error notification is executed according to the received error specification command)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate game from being executed due to a determination based on inappropriate set value information.

The gaming machine of the means A7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A6.
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The advantageous state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state for each variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 39, the variable display result determination module is used every time the CPU 103 executes the variable display. The part that judges the variable display result),
When the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied, the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means can be stored as the pending storage means (for example, the CPU 103 steps in FIG. 37 in the start winning determination process. The part that executes the processing of S510) and
Prior to the determination by the advantageous state determining means, it is possible to predetermine whether or not it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled based on the hold memory (for example, the winning time disturbance shown in FIG. 38 by the CPU 103). The part that executes the numerical judgment process) and
With more
The pre-determination means performs the pre-determination by executing a process common to a process for determining whether or not the advantageous state determining means controls the advantageous state (for example, when the CPU 103 wins a prize). The part that judges the variable display result using the variable display result judgment module also in the random number value judgment process)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a part of the processing of the advantageous state determination means and the pre-determination means can be shared, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the means A8 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A7.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state.
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means, and
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the special state determining means for determining
With more
The game control means can be controlled to the special state based on the determination that the special state determination means controls the special state (for example, the game control means is special based on the fact that the variable display result is a small hit. Figure The part that updates the process flag value to 8 "and controls it to the small hit game state),
The special state determination value is continuously common from a special reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range regardless of the set value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, regardless of the set value, the range from 32767 to 33094 is the small hit determination value with 32767 as the small hit reference value. The part set as a common numerical range),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state based on the special state determination value included in the common numerical range regardless of the set value set by the setting means. Each time, the set value information stored in the storage means is read, and the special state determination value included in the common numerical range corresponding to the set value specified from the read set value information is set (for example, FIG. As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is in the range of 32767 to 33094 regardless of the set value, and the variable special figure is the second special. In the case of a symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33421 regardless of the set value, but the CPU 103 always reads the set value from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display, and the read setting. A part that sets a display result judgment table according to the value and judges whether or not the variable display result is a small hit)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced, and the advantageous state determination means sets the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information. In this case, since the process of setting the advantageous state determination value and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information can be shared, the capacity of the processing program can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the means A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A8.
For the set value having the lowest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is not set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. If the set value is 1, the part where the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, for the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player, it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control only the common numerical range out of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range in an advantageous state. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A9.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31).
A random number value generation means for determination (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit is made according to the set set value. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the jackpot numerical range is in a normal state. The part set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the probabilistic state or
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the determination random value and the advantageous state determination generated by the determination random value value generation means are provided. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the value, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are predetermined criteria. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range from the value, the advantageous state determination means has a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the judgment random value and the advantageous state judgment value generated by the judgment random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the range, it is necessary to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A10.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the probability of being determined to control to the advantageous state is the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value. Game control that can control the normal state corresponding to the normal number, which is a number, or the special state corresponding to the special number, which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the advantageous state. Means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit is made according to the set set value. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is a big hit. As a reference value, the range from the 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range).
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the predetermined reference value in the predetermined numerical range regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example,. As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probability variation state).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the determination random value and the advantageous state determination generated by the determination random value value generation means are provided. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the value, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are predetermined criteria. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range from the value, the advantageous state determination means has a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the judgment random value and the advantageous state judgment value generated by the judgment random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the range, it is necessary to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state. Can be done.
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random value is the advantageous state determination value). When determining to control to an advantageous state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value becomes a predetermined reference value, which is advantageous. The state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the predetermined reference value according to whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means A12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A11.
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), which is an advantageous state (for example, for example) advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state).
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the special state determining means for determining
When the advantageous state determining means determines that the advantageous state is controlled, the advantageous state can be controlled, and when the special state determining means determines that the special state is controlled, the special state can be controlled. A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit is made according to the set set value. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, when the set value is 2). The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, from the second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, the range from 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value regardless of the set value. Is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value)
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is determined whether or not the special state is controlled by the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Part to judge whether),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, they are set to be in a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value (for example, FIGS. 19 to 22). As shown, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 328, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the small hit judgment is made. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of values is 655, but the numerical range of small hit judgment values is the part where 32767, which is a common value, is set as the small hit reference value regardless of the fluctuation special chart).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are executed. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to perform the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random value is the special state judgment value). When determining to control to a special state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determining means can determine whether or not to control the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of the means A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A12.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit is made according to the set set value. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, when the set value is 2). The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
The special state determination value is continuous from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The same number is set regardless of the set value set by the setting means so as to be the second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the numerical range of the small hit is set. In a range different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, 32767 is always set as the small hit reference value from 3267 to It is set as a continuous numerical range of 33094, and if the variable special figure is the second special symbol, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value, the special state judgment value is changed according to the set value. Since the numerical range of can always be specified in the same range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are executed. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to perform the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, when a common numerical range of special state judgment values is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random value and the special state judgment value generated by the judgment random value generation means While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the special state a plurality of times, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.

The gaming machine of the means A14 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A13.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
A setting value in a plurality of stages including at least an advantageous determination value and a disadvantage determination value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control the advantageous state, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. The probability of being determined to control to the advantageous state is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value, which is the normal state (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) corresponding to the normal number or the advantageous state. A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a probability change state) corresponding to a special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. The part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in 6) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit is made according to the set set value. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, when the set value is 2). The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the numerical range of the jackpot is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state).
The special state determination value is a second reference different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state in the set value having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The set value set by the setting means and the same number are set regardless of whether the normal state or the special state is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range from the value (for example,). As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, 1024 to 1346 or 1020-1674. In a range different from the numerical range of, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 32767 is always used as the small hit reference value regardless of whether the set value or the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probabilistic state. It is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094, and if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, 32767 is always set regardless of whether the set value or the gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probabilistic state. The part set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 as a small hit reference value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment means is set to the set value. Since the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change according to the set value to be set, the special state determination means always sets the numerical range of the special state determination value regardless of the set value. Since the same numerical range may be specified, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are executed. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is a common numerical value of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the range and the non-common numerical range, the process of determining whether or not to control the advantageous state is performed. The load can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the second common numerical range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical value of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value value generation means. While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the special state a plurality of times based on the range, in the present invention, the second common numerical range of the special state determination value is a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means controls the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the second common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it is only necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to perform once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.

The gaming machine of the means A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A14.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31).
A determination random number value generation means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 154) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit is made according to the set set value. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to each set value (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting value) that is not set by the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set to include the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to (values 2 to 6 excluding 1).
The common numerical range is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the jackpot determination is in the range of 1020-1237 with 1020 as the jackpot reference value. The part set in the common numerical range of values),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, shown in FIGS. 45 and 46). As described above, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60,000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60,000 as the reference value).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since the probability of being played can be made different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the game machine regarding the set value. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and is set to a value larger than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, or is advantageous. By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and setting it to a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common value is set according to the set value. Even if the number of advantageous state judgment values included in the numerical range increases, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value do not overlap, so the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value should be further reduced. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A14.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
One of the setting values of the plurality of stages having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to 6 which is the most advantageous setting value for the player. Setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 31) that can be set to the value of
A determination random number value generation means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 154) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit is made according to the set set value. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of judgment values),
As the advantageous state determination value, in a predetermined numerical range, a common numerical range common to each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). Non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values, which is a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6), which is different for each set value that can be set by the setting means. ) And is set,
The common numerical range is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the jackpot determination is in the range of 1020-1237 with 1020 as the jackpot reference value. The part set in the common numerical range of values),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, shown in FIGS. 45 and 46). As described above, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60,000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60,000 as the reference value).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since the probability of being played can be made different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the game machine regarding the set value. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and is set to a value larger than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, or is advantageous. By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and setting it to a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common value is set according to the set value. Even if the number of advantageous state judgment values included in the numerical range increases, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value do not overlap, so the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value should be further reduced. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A16.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
A setting value in a plurality of stages including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player. A setting means that can be set to any of the setting values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 31).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit is made according to the set set value. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) common to each set value that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Has been set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is a big hit. As a reference value, the range from the 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range).
Regardless of the set value set by the setting means, the same number of the special state determination values is set in a continuous range from the range of the advantageous state determination value (for example, shown in FIGS. 43 and 44). As described above, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to the numerical range including 328 judgment values in succession to the numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of the set value).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, in the present invention, since the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value and the numerical range of the special state determination value are continuously set, the determination random value generated by the determination random value value generating means is used to determine the advantageous state. Whether or not the value or the value is between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value or the value within the numerical range of the special state judgment value When determining to control to an advantageous state or a special state based on (whether or not there is), the determination random value generated by the determination random value value generating means is the minimum value in the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value. Whether or not the value is between and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state judgment value, or the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means is the maximum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. By determining whether or not the value is between the value and the maximum value in the numerical range of the special state determination value, it is possible to determine at once whether or not to control the advantageous state or the special state. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control and the processing load for determining whether or not to control a special state.

The gaming machine of the means A18 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A17.
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), which is an advantageous state (for example, for example) advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state).
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit is made according to the set set value. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to) that is not set in the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, when the set value is 2). The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, from the second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range. The same number is set so that it is a continuous second common numerical range.
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, 32767 is set regardless of the set value. The range from 32767 to 33094 as the small hit reference value is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value)
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is determined whether or not the special state is controlled by the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Part to judge whether),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, the setting having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state so as to be a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value. The value is set in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value. The number of judgment values included in is 328, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655, but the numerical value of the small hit judgment value. The range is different from the numerical range of 1020-1346, which is the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value in the probability variation state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and 32767 is set as the small hit reference value. , When the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33421)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment means is set to the set value. Since the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are executed. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to perform the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, when a common numerical range of special state judgment values is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random value and the special state judgment value generated by the judgment random value generation means While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the special state a plurality of times, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random value is the advantageous state determination value). When determining to control to an advantageous state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the first reference value. The advantageous state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the first reference value, depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random value is the special state judgment value). When determining to control to a special state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determining means can determine whether or not to control the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of the means A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A18.
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), which is an advantageous state (for example, for example) advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state).
A setting value in a plurality of stages including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player. A setting means that can be set to any of the setting values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 31).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control the advantageous state, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. The probability of being determined to control to the advantageous state is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value, which is the normal state (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) corresponding to the normal number or the advantageous state. A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a probability change state) corresponding to a special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. The part that executes the special symbol process processing shown in 6) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit is made according to the set set value. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, when the set value is 2). The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, from the second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, the range from 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value is set regardless of the set value. The part set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value),
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the numerical range of the jackpot is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in the normal state or the probabilistic state).
The number of the special state determination values is the same as the set value set by the setting means regardless of whether it is the normal state or the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22). In addition, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 and 1020 to 1674, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value is always used regardless of whether the set value or the gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state. If the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, 32767 to 33421 is always set as the small hit reference value regardless of whether the set value or the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state. The part that is set as a continuous numerical range of),
The number of the special state determination values is the same regardless of the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the numerical range of the small hit is a variable special figure. If is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. For example, regardless of the set value to be set, the part that is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value).
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the special state with the first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is determined whether or not the special state is controlled by the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Part to judge whether),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, the setting having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state so as to be a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value. The value is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is small. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655. The numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 32767 in a range different from the numerical range of 1020-1346, which is the numerical range of the big hit judgment value in the probability variation state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094 when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, and in the numerical range of 32767 to 33421 when the variable special figure is the second special symbol. Set part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment means is set to the set value. Since the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is advantageous to the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means. While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state a plurality of times based on each numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are executed. Is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state determination means is the first of the determination random value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it is only necessary to perform the determination of whether or not to control the advantageous state only once based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, when a common numerical range of special state judgment values is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random value and the special state judgment value generated by the judgment random value generation means While it is necessary to execute the determination of whether or not to control the special state a plurality of times, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the common numerical range of the determination random value and the special state determination value generated by the determination random value generation means. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random value is the advantageous state determination value). When determining to control to an advantageous state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value becomes a predetermined reference value, which is advantageous. The state determining means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the predetermined reference value according to whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random value is the special state judgment value). When determining to control to a special state based on (whether or not the value is within the numerical range of), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value is the second reference value. Since the special state determining means can determine whether or not to control the special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of the means A20 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A19.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31).
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit is made according to the set set value. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical range (for example, a range of 1020-1237, which is a common jackpot determination value) that is common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range. Numerical range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set by the first common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set to include the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value (value of 2 to 6 excluding 1).
The first common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value. The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The non-common numerical range is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 45 and 45). As shown in 46, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60,000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60,000 as the reference value).
The special state determination value is the first reference value and the specific reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value regardless of the set value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range from the second reference value different from the above (for example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the big hit. In a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the judgment value, regardless of the set value, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094. If the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the part is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state. In particular, in the present invention, since it is always determined whether or not to control the special state based on the numerical range of the same small hit determination value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state. In addition, the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control the special state can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of the means A21 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A19.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. And
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 31) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, 1 to 6) having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state. The part to execute) and
Judgment random number value generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state. 154) and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
Whether or not to control the special state based on the judgment random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the special state determining means for determining
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the determination that the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state determining means, and the special state is determined based on the determination that the special state determining means controls the special state. (For example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) and
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit is made according to the set set value. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of judgment values),
As the advantageous state determination value, a first common numerical range common to each set value that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). And the non-common numerical value range that is different for each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, 1238 to the value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6)). Numerical range) and is set,
The common numerical range is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is set as a jackpot reference value from the 1020. The part where the range up to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 45 and 46). As shown, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60,000 to the value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value with 60,000 as the reference value).
The special state determination value is the first reference value and the specific reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value regardless of the set value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a continuous common numerical range from the second reference value different from the above (for example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the big hit determination value. In a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of, regardless of the set value, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094, and the variable special figure is set. If the figure is the second special symbol, the part is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control in a special state. In particular, in the present invention, since it is always determined whether or not to control the special state based on the numerical range of the same small hit determination value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state. In addition, the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control the special state can be suppressed.

The game machine of means B1
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that controls the effect based on a command output from the game control means.
It is provided with an extraction means (for example, S101 of FIG. 6) for extracting random values (for example, MR1 to MR3).
The game control means
Variable display can be executed based on the random number value extracted from the extraction means (for example, S112 in FIG. 6).
A specific command (for example, commands 1 to 4 for transmitting a random number value) obtained by processing the random value (for example, step Sc031 in FIG. 49) is output to the effect control means (for example, step Sc032 in FIG. 49 and S27 in FIG. 4). ),
The effect control means restores the random number value from the specific command output from the game control means (for example, step Sc042 in FIG. 50), and an effect corresponding to variable display based on the restored random number value (for example, step Sc042 in FIG. 50). For example, the look-ahead notice effect) is controlled (for example, step Sc066 in FIG. 51).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.

The gaming machine of means B2 is the gaming machine described in means B1.
The specific command is a command for specifying a variable display pattern for executing variable display by pre-reading (for example, commands 1 to 4 for transmitting a random number value).
According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern is specified by the look-ahead on the sub side as the effect control means without pre-reading the variable display pattern on the main side, so that the pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced. it can.

The gaming machine of means B3 is the gaming machine according to means B1 or means B2.
The specific command is a command configured by converting the random number value extracted from the extraction means from a decimal number to a hexadecimal number and dividing the converted value into a plurality of commands (for example, FIG. 11-3).
The game control means outputs the plurality of commands at once (for example, step Sc032 in FIG. 49 and S27 in FIG. 4).
According to such a configuration, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side as the effect control means by outputting a plurality of commands at once, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side.

The gaming machine of means B4 is the gaming machine according to means B3.
The effect control means restores the random value by analyzing the plurality of commands in a predetermined order (for example, FIG. 11-3) (for example, step Sc042 in FIG. 50).
A storage means (for example, step Sc048 in FIG. 50) for storing a variable display pattern command based on the restored random number value is further provided.
According to such a configuration, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by using the variable display pattern command based on the random value restored on the sub side, the pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced. ..

The gaming machine of the means B5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means B2 to the means B4.
The game control means outputs a classification command (for example, a variable pattern distribution state designation command) capable of specifying a variable display pattern classification (for example, a category of a variable pattern table) to the effect control means (for example, FIG. 49). Step Sc022, step Sc023, and S27 in FIG. 4).
According to such a configuration, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by outputting the classification command that can specify the division of the variable display pattern, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side.

The gaming machine of the means B6 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means B2 to the means B5.
The game control means uses an advantageous state command (for example, a symbol designation command) that can specify whether or not to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player as a command different from the specific command. It is output to the effect control means (for example, step Sc027, step Sc029, step Sc030 in FIG. 49).
According to such a configuration, information on the most important result of success or failure is specified on the main side and output to the sub side, so that the safety can be improved. Further, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by transmitting the advantageous state command, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side.

The gaming machine of means B7 is the gaming machine according to means B5 or means B6.
The effect control means sets a table for determining a variable display pattern based on the division command and the advantageous state command (for example, step Sc045 and step Sc047 in FIG. 50), and the set table. And the effect corresponding to the variable display are controlled based on the restored random value (for example, step Sc048 in FIG. 50 and step Sc066 in FIG. 51).
According to such a configuration, the effect corresponding to the variable display is controlled from the table set based on the division command and the advantageous state command and the restored random number value, so that the pressure on the capacity on the main side is reduced. can do.

The gaming machine of the means B8 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means B1 to the means B7.
As an effect corresponding to the variable display, a look-ahead effect related to the variable display that triggered the transmission of the specific command is executed (for example, step Sc066 in FIG. 51).
According to such a configuration, since the look-ahead effect related to the variable display is executed by specifying the variable display pattern on the sub side, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side.

The game machine of means C1
When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the specific display result is the specific display result. A gaming machine capable of controlling a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the display result is derived and displayed.
A hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as hold storage, and
A determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) for determining whether or not to control the advantageous state and whether or not to control the special state based on the hold storage.
A flag information setting means (for example, CPU 103) that sets predetermined flag information according to a determination result by the determination means, and
An execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes a predetermined process according to a determination result by the determination means is provided.
The flag information setting means sets the flag information indicating that the flag information is controlled to the advantageous state and the flag information indicating that the flag information is controlled to the special state in a common flag storage area (for example, the CPU 103 determines in FIG. 52). Step S557E, 557F, 557C shown in the above),
The executing means is characterized in that a predetermined process is executed based on the flag information set in the common flag storage area (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S557G shown in FIG. 52). ..
According to this feature, the number of LD commands and the like can be reduced as compared with the case where the flag information indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state and the flag information indicating that the state is controlled in the special state are set separately. It is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as a control means.

Further, the gaming machine of means C2 is a gaming machine of means C1.
The flag information setting means does not set the flag information indicating that the advantageous state is controlled and the flag information indicating that the special state is controlled at the same time (for example, steps S557E and 557F shown by the CPU 103 in FIG. 52). The part that executes the process of 557C) is characterized.
According to this feature, the flag information indicating that the control is performed in an advantageous state and the flag information indicating that the flag information is controlled in a special state are set in the same common flag storage area, so that both are set at the same time. Can't happen. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of bugs in the game machine and the act of goto.

Further, the gaming machine of means C3 is a gaming machine of means C1 or means C2.
A symbol information storage means (for example, the CPU 103 displays in FIG. 52) stores information about a symbol to be derived and displayed as a variable display display result in a common symbol storage area regardless of the type of symbol based on the determination result by the determination means. A portion for executing the process of step S557G shown) is provided.
According to this feature, since the information about the symbol is also stored in the common symbol storage area, the LD command and the like can be reduced as compared with the case where the symbol is stored separately, so that the capacity of the main side as the game control means is compressed. Can be reduced.

Further, the gaming machine of the means C4 is any of the gaming machines of the means C1 to the means C3.
Prior to the determination by the determination means, the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the advantageous state and whether or not to control the special state based on the hold memory (for example, the start winning prize shown in FIG. 6). It has a part to execute the judgment process)
The flag information setting means is characterized in that flag information based on a determination result by the determination means is not set in the common flag storage area.
According to this feature, since the flag information based on the determination result (for example, the look-ahead result) by the determination means is not set in the common flag storage area, the risk of bugs and irregularities of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Further, the gaming machine of the means C5 is any of the gaming machines of the means C1 to the means C4.
The flag information setting means erases the flag information set in the common flag storage area before the determination by the determination means is performed (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S557A shown in FIG. 52). ..
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the risk that an unintended value is set in the common flag storage area.

Further, the gaming machine of the means C6 is any of the gaming machines of the means C1 to the means C5.
The determination means is
After deciding whether or not to control the advantageous state, it is decided whether or not to control the special state.
When it is determined that the control is performed in the advantageous state, it is not determined whether or not the control is performed in the special state (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of steps S557B and 557D shown in FIG. 52).
According to this feature, when it is decided to control in an advantageous state, it is not necessary to decide whether or not to control in a special state, so that the program can be compressed.

Further, the gaming machine of the means C7 is any of the gaming machines of the means C1 to the means C6.
When the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the update means for updating the state related to the game based on the flag information set in the common flag storage area (for example, the special symbol stop in step S113 shown in FIG. 6). In the process, the game state is updated based on the determination of whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit (for example, a big hit game or a small hit game is started, or a time saving state or a probability change state is ended. ), But the CPU 103 includes a portion) that refers to the common buffer at this time.
According to this feature, the flag information set in the common flag storage area can be used to update the state related to the game (that is, it can be used for other processing), so that the effect of compressing the capacity on the main side is enhanced. It becomes possible.

Further, the gaming machine of the means C8 is any of the gaming machines of the means C1 to the means C7.
It is possible to perform variable display and control the advantageous state, and it is also possible to control the advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a specific region while being controlled to the special state (for example, type 1 2). Seed spec game machine),
It can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player.
As a result of the variable display, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which the set value is, while the ratio controlled to the special state is the same regardless of which the set value is. (For example, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, but the small hit probability is the same).
According to this feature, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even if the game machine is likely to have a disadvantageous (low setting) setting value. Further, even if the frequency of being controlled to a special state is high, it is not necessary to LD (load) a small hit flag different from the big hit flag each time, so that the LD instruction etc. can be reduced and the main side can be used. The pressure on the capacity can be reduced.

The gaming machine described in means D1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) that controls the effect based on the command output from the game control means, and
It is provided with an extraction means (for example, S101 of FIG. 6) for extracting random values (for example, MR1 to MR3).
The game control means
Variable display can be executed based on the random number value extracted from the extraction means (for example, S112 in FIG. 6).
A specific command (for example, commands 1 to 4 for transmitting a random number value) obtained by processing the random value (for example, step Sc031 in FIG. 49) is output to the effect control means (for example, step Sc032 in FIG. 49, S27 in FIG. 5). ),
A first processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes the first processing (for example, the special symbol variation processing of FIG. 56) according to the timer value, and
A second process execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes a second process (for example, the special symbol stop process of FIG. 57) according to the timer value, and
A third process (for example, updating the timer of FIG. 53), which is executed prior to the first process and the second process and updates the timer value used in the first process and the timer value used in the second process. It has a third processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes processing), and has
The effect control means restores the random number value from the specific command output from the game control means (for example, step Sc042 in FIG. 50), and an effect corresponding to variable display based on the restored random number value (for example, step Sc042 in FIG. 50). For example, the look-ahead notice effect) is controlled (for example, step Sc066 in FIG. 51).
The first process executing means executes the first process based on the timer value information updated in the third process.
The second process executing means is characterized in that the second process is executed based on the timer value information updated in the third process.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.

Further, the gaming machine of means D2 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A multi-step setting value including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantage setting value having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to the most advantageous setting value for the player). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (values up to 6) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31).
A determination random number value generation means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 154) capable of generating a determination random number value for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state, and
Whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the determination random value generated by the determination random value generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39) and the advantageous state determining means for determining
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state.
With
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit is made according to the set set value. The part where the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different due to the difference in the number of judgment values),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range common to the set values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means in a predetermined numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to 1238 to each setting) that is not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value in a predetermined numerical range. It is set including the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value.
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the jackpot numerical range is in a normal state. It is characterized in that it is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as a jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in a probabilistic state or not).
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state, so that it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.
Further, in the game machine of means D2,
A first processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes the first processing (for example, the special symbol variation processing of FIG. 56) according to the timer value, and
A second process execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes a second process (for example, the special symbol stop process of FIG. 57) according to the timer value, and
A third process (for example, updating the timer of FIG. 53), which is executed prior to the first process and the second process and updates the timer value used in the first process and the timer value used in the second process. It has a third processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes processing), and has
The first process executing means executes the first process based on the timer value information updated in the third process.
A further feature may be that the second process executing means executes the second process based on the timer value information updated in the third process.
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.

In addition, the gaming machine of means D3
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, an advantageous state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player Steps S114 to S117) and
When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Special state control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes steps S118 to S120) and
A display result determining means (for example, CPU 103) that determines the display result of the variable display by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). Is the part that executes steps S59A, S64A, S59B, S64B)
A specific state control means (for example, the CPU 103 has steps S2207A, S2212A, etc.) that can control a non-specific state (for example, a non-specific state) and a specific state (for example, a probable state) that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the non-specific state. A part that executes S2207B and S2212B)
The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination) for determining to derive and display the specific display result as a display result of the variable display, and the special display as the display result of the variable display. It includes a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for determining to derive and display the result.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 changes the setting value shown in FIG. 31) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having a different number of specific determination values. The part that executes the process)
The number of the special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and when controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 58-2 and FIG. 58-3).
According to this feature, appropriate game playability can be realized, and the capacity can be compressed by sharing the number of special determination values, so that the pressure on the capacity on the main side as a game control means is reduced. be able to.
Further, in the game machine of means D3,
A first processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes the first processing (for example, the special symbol variation processing of FIG. 56) according to the timer value, and
A second process execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes a second process (for example, the special symbol stop process of FIG. 57) according to the timer value, and
A third process (for example, updating the timer of FIG. 53), which is executed prior to the first process and the second process and updates the timer value used in the first process and the timer value used in the second process. It has a third processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes processing), and has
The first process executing means executes the first process based on the timer value information updated in the third process.
A further feature may be that the second process executing means executes the second process based on the timer value information updated in the third process.
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.

In addition, the gaming machine of means D4
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect by any of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed by the predetermined effect executing means (for example, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the symbol (variable display mode). (Timing before reaching)), the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed in preference to the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used in FIG. 59- of the first embodiment). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 2, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach advance notice lottery, the execution of the reach advance notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in step S294 with priority over the setting suggestion. If the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is not won even if the lottery for the setting suggestion is executed in the part to be performed or in step S296, the reach based on the pattern PT-8 is not won in step S301. A part that prioritizes the execution of the notice (low) over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. / The effect control CPU 120 determines the reach notice (high)> setting suggestion. (High)> Reach notice (Low)> Setting suggestion (Low) A part that determines the execution of the effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio (see FIG. 59-7 of Modification 1). )), It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of a specific mode from being executed and the effect from becoming inappropriate.
Further, the gaming machine of the means D4 may be applied to the gaming machines of the means D1 to the means D3. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately realize the effect related to the set value while reducing the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.

Further, the gaming machine of means D5 is
It can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3 or set values 1 to 6, etc.), and is in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player at a different ratio depending on the set set value. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to the gaming state).
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is provided.
The specific effect executing means has an appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is the first set value and an appearance of the specific effect when the set value is a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the rate and the rate are within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIGS. 60-1 (B), (C), 60-2 to 60-3). There is.
According to this feature, since the specific effect can be executed at a common appearance rate regardless of the set value, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the gaming machine of the means D5 may be applied to the gaming machines of the means D1 to the means D3. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means and to appropriately execute the specific effect regardless of the set value.

Further, the gaming machine of means D6 is a gaming machine of means D1.
The third processing execution means is characterized in that a plurality of types of timer values (for example, timer values of a special figure fluctuation time timer and a normal figure fluctuation time timer) are updated in the third processing.
According to this feature, since compression can be achieved in a plurality of processes, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as a game control means.

Further, the gaming machine of means D7 is a gaming machine of means D1 or means D6.
The game control means has a fourth process execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes a fourth process (for example, the special symbol process process of FIG. 54) capable of calling the first process and the second process, respectively. And
In the fourth process, the fourth process executing means updates the specific flag information based on the timer value information updated in the third process (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes step S100 in FIG. 54). ,
The first process execution means and the second process execution means can execute different processes depending on whether or not the specific flag information updated in the fourth process has a predetermined value. It is a feature.
According to this feature, since efficient compression is possible, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as a game control means.

The gaming machine of the means E1 is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and is advantageous for the player when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. An advantageous state control means that can control a state (for example, a jackpot game state) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes steps S114 to S117) and a special display result (for example, a portion that is different from the specific display result as the variable display display result). When the small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, the special state control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes steps S118 to S120) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state is formed. , A display result determining means (for example, a display result determining means for determining a variable display display result) using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for a big hit determination, a determination value for a small hit determination). The CPU 103 controls a part in which steps S59A, S64A, S59B, and S64B are executed), a non-specific state (for example, a non-specific state), and a specific state (for example, a probable state) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state. A possible specific state control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes steps S2207A, S2212A, S2207B, S2212B) is provided, and the determination value is determined to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display. Specific judgment value (for example, judgment value for big hit judgment) and special judgment value for deciding to derive and display the special display result as the display result of variable display (for example, judgment value for small hit judgment) A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 shows FIG. 31) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. The number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value, and the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value, and when it is controlled to a non-specific state and when it is controlled to a specific state. It is characterized in that it is common (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). According to such a configuration, appropriate playability can be realized.

The gaming machine of the means E1 is the gaming machine described in the means E2, and can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol). And the variable display execution means (for example, the CPU 103 can execute the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel) in steps S110A to S113A and the second special symbol process process of the first special symbol process process (step S25A). (Parts that execute processes corresponding to steps S110A to S113A in step S25B) and a special state in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol). For example, the KT state) is configured to include a controllable special state control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes steps S2208A, S2213A, S2214A, S2219A, S2220A, S2208B, S2213B, S2214B, S2219B, S2220B). You may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate playability in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state.

The gaming machine of the means E3 is the gaming machine according to the means E2, and the special state control means has more advantages than the first special state (for example, the first KT state) and the first special state as a special state. It may be configured to be controllable to a higher second special state (eg, second KT state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate playability in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state.

The gaming machine of the means E3 is the gaming machine according to the means E2 or the means E3, and executes a special suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 58-37) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. It is provided with a possible special suggestion effect executing means (for example, a portion that executes step S930 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) according to a process table including the small hit RUSH continuous suggestion effect selected in step S928 in the effect control CPU 120). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by suggesting the advantage of the special state.

The gaming machine of the means E5 is the gaming machine described in any one of the means E1 to the means E4, and as the display result of the variable display, a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol). When a variable display in which a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the above is derived and displayed is executed, a set value suggestion effect suggesting a set value (for example, a set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 58-35) is performed. It is provided with an executable setting value suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion that executes step S930 and the variable display effect processing (step S172) according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step S928 in the effect control CPU 120). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of the means E6 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means E1 to the means E5, and the special state control means can control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). A portion in which the CPU 103 executes steps S67A and S67B by using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state to determine the type of the special state. ), And the number of special type determination values may be configured to be common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-5). According to such a configuration, more appropriate playability can be realized.

The gaming machine of the means E7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means E1 to the means E6, and the advantageous state control means has a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot, 9R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, It is possible to control 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot), and the type of advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. It is configured to include advantageous type determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes steps S62A and S62B), and the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-4). May be good. According to such a configuration, more appropriate playability can be realized.

The gaming machine of the means E8 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means E1 to the means E7, and is variable by using a variable display mode determination value (for example, a variable pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. A variable display mode determining means for determining the display mode (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a process corresponding to step S1703A of the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) and step S1703A of the second variation pattern setting process) is provided. The number of variable display mode determination values may be configured to be common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-9). According to such a configuration, more appropriate playability can be realized.

The game machine of means F1
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect by any of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed by the predetermined effect executing means (for example, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the symbol (variable display mode). (Timing before reaching)), the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed in preference to the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used in FIG. 59- of the first embodiment). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 2, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach advance notice lottery, the execution of the reach advance notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in step S294 with priority over the setting suggestion. If the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is not won even if the lottery for the setting suggestion is executed in the part to be performed or in step S296, the reach based on the pattern PT-8 is not won in step S301. A part that prioritizes the execution of the notice (low) over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. / The effect control CPU 120 determines the reach notice (high)> setting suggestion. (High)> Reach notice (Low)> Setting suggestion (Low) A part that determines the execution of the effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio (see FIG. 59-7 of Modification 1). )))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of a specific mode from being executed and the effect from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of the means F2 is the gaming machine described in the means F1.
The special aspect is a first special aspect (for example, reach notice (low)) and a second special aspect (for example, reach notice) that suggests that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first special aspect. (High)), including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second special aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example). When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the reach advance notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 59-2 of the first embodiment, the reach advance notice based on the pattern PT-9 in step S294 (High) execution is determined with priority over setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 59-2 of the first embodiment, step S298. The part in which the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is prioritized over the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of the means F3 is the gaming machine according to the means F1 or the means F2.
The specific aspect is a first specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (high)) that suggests setting of a setting value having a higher advantage than the first specific aspect. )) Including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example). When any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the lottery for suggesting the setting in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 59-2 of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 has a pattern in step S298. The part that determines the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of PT-5 to PT-7 in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the reach notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 59-2 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 in step S301. The part that determines the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the above, prioritizing the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-4)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect.

The gaming machine of the means F4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means F1 to the means F3.
An operation promotion notification means capable of executing an operation promotion notification for prompting the player to execute an operation (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation promotion effect for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. (Feasible part) and
An operation detecting means (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific operation (for example, an operation for operating the push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the operation promotion notification by the operation prompting means is executed. When,
With
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific operation by the motion detecting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 presses the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific operation to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not the operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can perform the effect of changing to image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it). Modification example)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a player who knows a specific motion can execute a predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means F5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means F1 to the means F4.
The predetermined effect is a common effect period (for example, either a reach notice or a setting suggestion) in which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect or the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. Regardless of the presence or absence, the effect of the mode in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area is executed) and the predetermined aspect of the special aspect. A non-common production period (for example, whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion) that can specify whether the effect is the effect or the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be specified, that is, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern Is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward from the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIG. 59-5).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by having a common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation as to which of the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of the means F6 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means F1 to F5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special aspect which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion of setting (for example, both a reach notice and a setting suggestion can be executed). Occasionally, a specific image suggesting both a jackpot and the highest setting (setting value 6) (for example, an image in which a paraglider in which a character appears moves while displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider) is displayed. Part etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

The game machine of means G1
It can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3 or set values 1 to 6, etc.), and is in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player at a different ratio depending on the set set value. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to the gaming state).
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is provided.
The specific effect executing means has an appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is the first set value and an appearance of the specific effect when the set value is a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the rate and the rate are within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIGS. 60-1 (B) and 60-3, FIGS. 60-2 to 60-3).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed at a common appearance rate regardless of the set value, so that the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means G2 is the gaming machine described in means G1.
The specific effect executing means makes the execution ratio of the specific effect when it is not controlled to the advantageous state different according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 60-1 (B), (C), 60-2, 60". -4) You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect can be suitably adjusted while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means G3 is the gaming machine according to the means G1 or the means G2.
The specific effect executing means makes the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state different according to the set value (for example, FIGS. 60-1 (B), 60-2 to 60-4). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect can be preferably adjusted.

The gaming machine of the means G4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means G1 to the means G3.
The ratio (for example, reliability) controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed is within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 60-1 (B), 60). -3, Fig. 60-4).
According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set value, and the control is performed in an advantageous state, so that the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means G5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means G1 to the means G4.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed may be changed depending on the set value (for example, FIGS. 60-1 (C) and 60-2).
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect is adjusted, but the reliability is changed, so that it is possible to provide a game playability in which the reliability is estimated, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means G6 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means G1 to the means G5.
There are multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may make the execution ratio of the specific effect different depending on the set value for each type of the controlled advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 60-2 to 60-4).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be obtained according to the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest will be improved. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves the interest.

The gaming machine of the means G7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means G1 to the means G6.
There are multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 60-2 to 60-4).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be obtained regardless of the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest will be improved.

The game machine of means H is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A storage means for storing data (for example, a data area of ROM 101) and
By specifying a relative value from a specific address, a specific instruction (for example, an LDT instruction) for reading data from the storage area of the storage means at the specified address is executed based on a program (for example, an intra-area program). Instruction execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100) and
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect by any of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. The part that can execute the setting suggestion based on, or the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9),
The storage means has a plurality of table-format data (for example, a determination value for a jackpot lottery, a determination value for determining a fluctuation pattern, etc.) used in a predetermined range of storage areas starting from the specific address according to the progress of the game. Table format data) is stored and
The specific instruction is used in a program (for example, reading a determination value of a big hit lottery) that is frequently executed by the instruction executing means.
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed by the predetermined effect executing means (for example, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the symbol (variable display mode). (Timing before reaching)), the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed in preference to the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used in FIG. 59- of the first embodiment). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 2, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach advance notice lottery, the execution of the reach advance notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in step S294 with priority over the setting suggestion. If the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is not won even if the lottery for the setting suggestion is executed in the part to be performed or in step S296, the reach based on the pattern PT-8 is not won in step S301. A part that prioritizes the execution of the notice (low) over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. / The effect control CPU 120 determines the reach notice (high)> setting suggestion. (High)> Reach notice (Low)> Setting suggestion (Low) A part that determines the execution of the effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio (see FIG. 59-7 of Modification 1). )))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of a specific mode from being executed and the effect from becoming inappropriate.

Further, in the game machine of each means described above, the features provided by the game machine of the following means X may be added.
The game machine of means X is
A storage means for storing data (for example, a data area of ROM 101) and
By specifying a relative value from a specific address, a specific instruction (for example, an LDT instruction) for reading data from the storage area of the storage means at the specified address is executed based on a program (for example, an intra-area program). A command executing means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) is provided.
The storage means has a plurality of table-format data (for example, a determination value for a jackpot lottery, a determination value for determining a fluctuation pattern, etc.) used in a predetermined range of storage areas starting from the specific address according to the progress of the game. Table format data) is stored and
The specific instruction is used for a program (for example, reading a determination value of a big hit lottery) that is frequently executed by the instruction executing means.
It is characterized by that.
By combining the features of the gaming machine of the means X with the gaming machine of each means, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program and reduce the code capacity.

1 Pachinko game machine 5 Production display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can be set to any of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player.
A storage means for storing data and
By specifying a relative value from a specific address, an instruction execution means for executing a specific instruction for reading data from the storage area of the storage means at the specified address based on a program, and
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect by any one of a plurality of types of effect modes is provided.
The storage means stores a plurality of table format data used according to the progress of the game in a storage area in a predetermined range starting from the specific address.
The specific instruction is used in a program that is frequently executed by the instruction executing means.
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a specific mode that suggests the setting.
When both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect executing means executes the predetermined effect of the special aspect with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific aspect. It is possible,
A game machine characterized by that.